Free Shipping on Equipment & Parts orders of $200 or more! * Click for Restrictions

Have a question? 800-440-6723 International: 803-252-0100

English Se habla español
Parts › PartFinder › Tennant 8300 › Operator manual
Form 330630, Rev. 20 (8-2015)
Tennant · Ride-on sweeper-scrubber

Tennant 8300 Operator Manual

330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015)154 pages8300 (Battery) Sweeper Scrubber, North America / International

FaST is discontinued. FaST cartridges and FaST parts are no longer available from Tennant.

Before first use: charge the batteries overnight before you run the machine the first time.
Free to read, no account neededEvery page has its own linkPart numbers link to the part
COVER

8300 (Battery) Sweeper Scrubber Operator Manual

North America / International‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​​‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‌⁠​‍​⁠​‌‍⁠‍⁠‍‍​​​​‌​

The Safe Scrubbing Alternative®
ES® Extended Scrub System
TennantTrue® Parts
IRIS® a Tennant Technology

For latest parts manual or other language operator manual, visit: www.tennantco.com/manuals

330630
Rev. 20 (8-2015)

Tennant 8300 battery-powered ride-on sweeper scrubber seen from the front left, with the steering wheel and seat on top, the side brush at the front left and the model name 8300 on the side
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 1, used with permission. SES ref PF-UBYT-AH37‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​​‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‌⁠​‍​⁠​‌‍⁠‍⁠‍‍​​​​‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 1 of 154
FRONT MATTER

This manual is furnished with each new model. It provides necessary operation and maintenance instructions.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​​‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​‍⁠⁠​​⁠‍​​⁠‍‍​‌‌

IMPORTANT Read this manual completely and understand the machine before operating or servicing it.

This machine will provide excellent service. However, the best results will be obtained at minimum costs if:

  • The machine is operated with reasonable care.
  • The machine is maintained regularly - per the machine maintenance instructions provided.
  • The machine is maintained with manufacturer supplied or equivalent parts.

PROTECT THE ENVIRONMENT

In short This page asks you to dispose of packaging and old machine parts safely and to recycle. It also provides a form for recording the machine's model, serial number and other details at installation.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​​‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​‍⁠⁠​​⁠‍​​⁠‍‍​‌‌
Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol above a recycling symbol of three chasing arrows

Please dispose of packaging materials, old machine components such as batteries, hazardous fluids such as antifreeze and oil, in an environmentally safe way according to local waste disposal regulations.

Always remember to recycle.

MACHINE DATA

Please fill out at time of installation for future reference.

Model No. −
Serial No. −
Machine Options −
Sales Rep. −
Sales Rep. phone no. −
Customer Number −
Installation Date −

Side view of the sweeper-scrubber with an arrow pointing to the machine data plate on the operator compartment

Tennant Company
PO Box 1452
Minneapolis, MN 55440
Phone: (800) 553−8033 or (763) 513−2850
www.tennantco.com

Thermo−Sentry, SmartRelease, SuperScrub, and MaxPro are US registered and unregistered trademarks of Tennant Company.

Specifications and parts are subject to change without notice.

Copyright © 2000 − 2002, 2004 − 2015 TENNANT Company, Printed in U.S.A.

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 2, used with permission. SES ref PF-YE2W-AEAB‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​​‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​‍⁠⁠​​⁠‍​​⁠‍‍​‌‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 2 of 154
CONTENTS

CONTENTS

TopicPage
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS3
Operation7
Operator Responsibility7
Machine Components8
Symbol Definitions9
Symbol Definitions10
Controls And Instruments11
Operation Of Controls12
Brake Pedal12
Parking Brake Pedal12
Directional Pedal12
Steering Wheel13
On-Off Key Switch14
Horn Button14
Power Kill Switch15
Operating Lights Switch15
Power Wand Switch (Option)15
Solution Flow Lever16
Steering Column Tilt Lever16
Fast Switch16
Ec−H2o Switch (Option)17
Control Panel17
Changing Display Language18
Battery Discharge Indicator19
Hourmeter19
Display Clock20
Setting The Display Clock20
Scrub Switch21
Recovery Tank Full Indicator22
Es Switch (Option)22
Edge Scrub Switch23
Rear Squeegee Switch23
Sweep Switch24
Side Brush Switch24
Filter Shaker Switch25
Vacuum Fan Switch25
Hopper Temperature Indicator − Thermo Sentry26
Hopper Raise Switch26
Hopper Lower Switch26
Hopper Dump Switch27
Hopper Retract Switch27
Detergent Pump Switch (Option)28
Maintenance Mode29
Resetting The Maintenance Timers29
Disabling The Maintenance Mode31
Circuit Breakers32
Fuses34
Solution Tank Drain Hose35
Recovery Tank Drain Hose35
Positive Solution Control Drain (Option)35
Side Brush Adjustment Knob36
Front Flap Lever36
Hopper Support Bar36
Operator Seat37
Deluxe Suspension Seat (Option)37
How The Machine Works39
FaST Scrubbing System40
ec−H20 System (Option)41
Pre-Operation Checklist42
Installing FaST Pak Agent43
Starting The Machine45
Filling The Tanks46
Sweeping, Scrubbing And Brush Information49
Sweeping51
Stop Sweeping51
Emptying The Hopper52
Engaging Hopper Support Bar54
Disengaging Hopper Support Bar55
Scrubbing57
Double Scrubbing61
Stop Scrubbing61
Draining And Cleaning The Tanks62
Stop The Machine67
Post-Operation Checklist68
Operation On Inclines69
Options69
Vacuum Wand69
Power Wand73
Machine Troubleshooting79
TopicPage
Maintenance82
Maintenance Chart82
Lubrication85
Propelling Gearbox85
Front Wheel Support Bearing85
Scrub Head Drag Link Arms (Sn 000000−004780)86
Hopper Lift Arms87
Steering Gear Chain88
Hopper Lift Drive Chain88
Hopper Tilt Drive Chain88
Hydraulics89
Hydraulic Fluid Reservoir89
Hydraulic Fluid90
Hydraulic Hoses90
Batteries91
Checking The Electrolyte Level91
Maintenance−Free Batteries92
Checking Connections / Cleaning92
Charging The Batteries92
Control Panel94
Electric Motors96
Propelling Circuit96
Sweeping Assembly97
Dust Filter97
Removing The Dust Filter98
Thermo Sentry101
Main Sweeping Brush102
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 3, used with permission. SES ref PF-LS4Q-TR2M‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠‍‍​‌‌‌‍​​⁠⁠‌⁠‌⁠⁠‌‌​‍​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 3 of 154
CONTENTS

CONTENTS

EntryPage
Replacing The Main Sweeping Brush102
Checking And Adjusting The Main Sweeping Brush Pattern103
Cylindrical Conveyor105
Replacing The Cylindrical Conveyor105
Side Sweeping Brush107
Replacing And Adjusting The Side Sweeping Brush(Es)107
Scrub Head108
Scrub Head Gas Spring108
Scrub Head Adjustments108
Scrub Brushes109
Disk Brushes109
Replacing The Disk Brushes109
Cylindrical Brushes111
Checking And Adjusting Cylindrical Brush Pattern111
Replacing The Cylindrical Brushes114
Solution System116
Solution Valve116
Recovery Tank116
Solution Tank117
Fast System118
Fast Supply Hose Connector118
Fast System Filter Screen118
Fast System Air Pump Filter (Sn 000000−004791)118
Fast System Air Pump Filter (S/N 004792− )119
Ec−H2o Module Flush Procedure120
Squeegees122
Rear Squeegee122
Leveling The Rear Squeegee122
Adjusting Rear Squeegee Blade Deflection123
Removing The Rear Squeegee Assembly124
Side Squeegee125
Adjusting The Side Squeegee125
Squeegee Blades125
Rear Squeegee Blades125
Replacing Or Rotating The Rear Squeegee Blades125
Side Squeegees Blades127
Replacing The Side Squeegee Blades127
Belts And Chains128
Scrub Brush Drive Belts128
Sweeping Brush Drive Belt128
Main Sweeping Brush Belt128
Sweeping Vacuum Fan Belt129
Steering Gear Chain129
Static Drag Chain129
Hopper Lift Drive Chain130
Hopper Tilt Drive Chain130
Skirts And Seals131
Front Flap Skirt131
Recirculation Skirts131
Side Skirts131
Scrub Head Floor Skirts132
Top Cover Seals132
Side Cover Seal132
Hopper Filter Seals133
Hopper Vacuum Fan Seal133
Hopper Seals133
Solution Tank Cover Seal134
Recovery Tank Cover Seal134
Brakes And Tires135
Brakes135
Tires135
Front Wheel135
Pushing, Towing, And Transporting The Machine136
Pushing Or Towing The Machine136
Transporting The Machine136
Machine Jacking138
Storage Information139
Freeze Protection (Machines Without Optional Ec−H2o System)139
Freeze Protecting The Ec−H2o System140
Flushing Antifreeze From The Ec−H2o Module142
Specifications143
Fast System143
General Machine Performance144
Power Type144
Steering145
Hydraulic Systems145
Braking System145
Tires145
Ec−H20 System145
Machine Dimensions146
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 4, used with permission. SES ref PF-46JD-PIEZ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‌​​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍‌​‍​⁠⁠⁠‍‌​‌⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‌​⁠​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 4 of 154
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

In short This section explains the warning symbols used in the manual and lists safety rules for operating, starting, using, leaving and servicing the machine. Operators should read it carefully and report any machine damage or faulty operation immediately.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠​‍‌‍‌⁠‌​​‍‍⁠⁠‍‌​‌‍⁠​​

The following symbols are used throughout this manual as indicated in their description:‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠​‍‌‍‌⁠‌​​‍‍⁠⁠‍‌​‌‍⁠​​

WARNING: To warn of hazards or unsafe practices that could result in severe personal injury or death.

FOR SAFETY: To identify actions that must be followed for safe operation of equipment.

The following information signals potentially dangerous conditions to the operator or equipment. Read this manual carefully. Know when these conditions can exist. Locate all safety devices on the machine. Then, take necessary steps to train machine operating personnel. Report machine damage or faulty operation immediately. Do not use the machine if it is not in proper operating condition.

WARNING: Batteries emit hydrogen gas. Explosion or fire can result. Keep sparks and open flame away. Keep covers open when charging.
WARNING: Flammable materials can cause an explosion or fire. Do not use flammable materials in tank(s).
WARNING: Flammable materials or reactive metals can cause explosion or fire. Do not pick up.
WARNING: Moving belt and fan. Keep away.
WARNING: Lift arm pinch point. Stay clear of hopper lift arms.
WARNING: Raised hopper may fall. Engage hopper support bar.
WARNING: This product contains chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

This machine may be equiped with technology that automatically communicates over the cellular network. If this machine will be operated where cell phone use is restricted because of concerns related to equipment interference, please contact a Tennant representative for information on how to disable the cellular communication functionality.

FOR SAFETY:

  1. Do not operate machine:
    • Unless trained and authorized.
    • Unless operation manual is read and understood.
    • Unless mentally and physically capable of following machine instructions.
    • In flammable or explosive areas unless designed for use in those areas.
    • In areas with possible falling objects unless equipped with overhead guard.
  2. Before starting machine:
    • Make sure all safety devices are in place and operate properly.
    • Check brakes and steering for proper operation.
  3. When starting machine:
    • Keep foot on brake and directional pedal in neutral.
  4. When using machine:
    • Use brakes to stop machine.
    • Go slow on inclines and slippery surfaces.
    • Use care when backing machine.
    • Do not carry riders on machine.
    • Follow mixing and handling instructions on chemical containers.
    • Always follow safety and traffic rules.
    • Report machine damage or faulty operation immediately.
    • Follow safety guidelines concerning wet floors.
  5. Before leaving or servicing machine:
    • Stop on level surface.
    • Set parking brake.
    • Turn off machine and remove key.
  6. When servicing machine:
    • Avoid moving parts. Do not wear loose jackets, shirts, or sleeves when working on machine.
    • Block machine tires before jacking machine up.
    • Jack machine up at designated locations only. Block machine up with jack stands.
    • Use hoist or jack that will support the weight of the machine.
    • Wear eye and ear protection when using pressurized air or water.
    • Disconnect battery connections before working on machine.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 5, used with permission. SES ref PF-MIR2-AJEJ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠​‍‌‍‌⁠‌​​‍‍⁠⁠‍‌​‌‍⁠​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 5 of 154
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
  • Wear protective gloves and eye protection when handling vinegar.
  • Avoid contact with battery acid.
  • Use Tennant supplied or equivalent replacement parts.
  1. When loading/unloading machine onto/off truck or trailer:
    • Turn off machine.
    • Use truck or trailer that will support the weight of the machine.
    • Use winch. Do not drive the machine onto/off the truck or trailer unless the load height is 380 mm (15 in) or less from the ground.
    • Set parking brake after machine is loaded.
    • Block machine tires.
    • Tie machine down to truck or trailer.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 6, used with permission. SES ref PF-EWOT-DFEN‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‌‌‍‌​‍​​‌​⁠‌​​‍​​​⁠⁠​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 6 of 154
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

In short This page shows where the safety labels are placed on the machine. If any label becomes damaged or illegible, a new label must be installed in its place.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‌​⁠⁠‌​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​⁠‌‍‌​​⁠⁠‌

The safety labels appear on the machine in the locations indicated. If these or any label becomes damaged or illegible, install a new label in its place.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‌​⁠⁠‌​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​⁠‌‍‌​​⁠⁠‌

Drawing of the 8300 ride-on scrubber-sweeper with three safety labels shown enlarged and connected by lines to their locations: the For Safety label (read manual before operating machine) inside the operator compartment, the Warning battery charging label on the lintel, and the Warning moving belt and fan label on the vacuum fan shroud

FOR SAFETY LABEL – LOCATED ON THE INSIDE OF THE OPERATOR COMPARTMENT.

BATTERY CHARGING LABEL – LOCATED ON THE LINTEL.

ENGINE FAN AND BELT LABEL – LOCATED ON THE VACUUM FAN SHROUD.

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 7, used with permission. SES ref PF-GGDG-SQ4N‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‌​⁠⁠‌​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​⁠‌‍‌​​⁠⁠‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 7 of 154
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

In short This page shows where the warning labels are located on the machine: flammable materials, flammable spills, hopper support bar and hopper lift arms.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‍​​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍‌⁠​‍‌​​⁠⁠​‍⁠⁠​‌​⁠⁠‌​⁠​
The 8300 machine with lines from it to four warning labels: flammable materials in the solution tank cover, flammable spills in the operator compartment, raised hopper may fall at the hopper support bar, and lift arm pinch point on the hopper lift arms
353391

FLAMMABLE MATERIALS LABEL − LOCATED ON THE INSIDE OF THE SOLUTION TANK COVER.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‍​​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍‌⁠​‍‌​​⁠⁠​‍⁠⁠​‌​⁠⁠‌​⁠​

FLAMMABLE SPILLS LABEL − LOCATED ON THE INSIDE OF THE OPERATOR COMPARTMENT.

HOPPER SUPPORT BAR LABEL − LOCATED ON THE HOPPER SUPPORT BAR AND ON BOTH HOPPER LIFT ARMS.

HOPPER LIFT ARMS LABEL − LOCATED ON BOTH HOPPER LIFT ARMS.

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 8, used with permission. SES ref PF-KZDZ-54UZ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‍​​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍‌⁠​‍‌​​⁠⁠​‍⁠⁠​‌​⁠⁠‌​⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 8 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITY

In short This section lists what the operator is responsible for: daily maintenance and checkups, reading the manual before use, checking for shipping damage, keeping up regular maintenance, and ordering parts through an authorized Tennant representative. After the first 50 hours, follow the maintenance chart.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​​‍⁠​‍​⁠⁠‌‌‍‌⁠⁠​⁠⁠​‌‍‌‌‍⁠
  • The operator’s responsibility is to take care of the daily maintenance and checkups of the machine to keep it in good working condition. The operator must inform the service mechanic or supervisor when the maintenance intervals are required as stated in the MAINTENANCE section of this manual.
  • Read this manual carefully before operating this machine.
FOR SAFETY: Do not operate machine, unless operation manual is read and understood.
  • Check the machine for shipping damage. Check to make sure the machine is complete per shipping instructions.
  • Keep your machine regularly maintained by following the maintenance information in this manual. We recommend taking advantage of a regularly scheduled service contract from your Tennant representative.
  • Order parts and supplies directly from your authorized Tennant representative. Use the parts manual provided when ordering parts.
  • After the first 50 hours of operation, follow the recommended procedures stated in the MAINTENANCE CHART.
Drawing of an open operator manual on the left and a person's head in profile on the right, with a dashed line from the manual to the eye, showing the operator should read the manual
07324
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 9, used with permission. SES ref PF-MCZK-OUAZ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​​‍⁠​‍​⁠⁠‌‌‍‌⁠⁠​⁠⁠​‌‍‌‌‍⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 9 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

MACHINE COMPONENTS

In short This page identifies the main parts of the machine with lettered callouts on two photos, one from the rear and one from the front, with a key listing parts A to Q.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍‌‌‍​⁠​​​‌‌‍⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌‍​​⁠
Rear three-quarter view of the scrubber-sweeper with letter callouts A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, N, O, P and Q pointing to the steering wheel, solution tank cover, battery compartment, drains, rear squeegee, rear wheel, recovery tank, side squeegee, side access door, hopper cover, top access door, recovery tank cover and FaST system module
Front three-quarter view of the machine with callouts A, B, C, D, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, P and Q pointing to the steering wheel, operator seat, tank covers, battery compartment, rear wheel, recovery tank, side squeegee, side access door, hopper, side brush, hopper cover and FaST system module
  1. Steering wheel
  2. Operator seat
  3. Solution tank cover
  4. Battery compartment
  5. Solution tank drain
  6. Rear squeegee
  7. Recovery tank drain
  8. Rear wheel
  9. Recovery tank
  10. Side squeegee
  11. Side access door
  12. Hopper
  13. Side brush
  14. Hopper cover
  15. Top access door
  16. Recovery tank cover
  17. FaST solution system
    ec−H2O System Module (Option)
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 10, used with permission. SES ref PF-PNMU-DC2R‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍‌‌‍​⁠​​​‌‌‍⁠‍​⁠‍‍‌‍​​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 10 of 154
OPERATION

SYMBOL DEFINITIONS

In short This page shows the symbols used on the machine's controls and displays, each with its name. Use it to identify what each control or display symbol means.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​​⁠‍​‍‍‍‍⁠⁠‌​‌‌​‌⁠⁠​‌‌‌⁠

These symbols identify controls, displays, and features on the machine:‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​​⁠‍​‍‍‍‍⁠⁠‌​‌‌​‌⁠⁠​‌‌‌⁠

SymbolMeaningSymbolMeaning
Battery symbol
Battery charging system
Tank with liquid at top and downward arrow, solution tank full symbol
Solution tank full
Hourglass symbol for hourmeter
Hourmeter
Tank with low liquid level and arrow, solution tank low symbol
Solution tank low
Steering wheel with up and down arrow, steering tilt symbol
Steering tilt
Sweep switch symbol, brush on floor
Sweep switch
Key symbol for key switch
Key switch
Starburst brush symbol, sweep brush up and off
Sweep brush up and off
ES logo symbol
ES (option)
Starburst brush above a floor line, sweep brush down and on
Sweep brush down and on
Filter with shaking hammer arrow, filter shaker symbol
Filter shaker
Side brush symbol, up and off
Side brush up and off
Fan symbol for vacuum fan
Vacuum fan
Side brush with down arrow, down and on
Side brush down and on
Scrub switch symbol, scrub brush on floor
Scrub switch
Hopper with up arrow, raise hopper
Raise hopper
Scrub brush symbol, up and off
Scrub brush up and off
Hopper with down arrow, lower hopper
Lower hopper
Scrub brush with down arrow and pressure marks
Scrub brush down pressure
Hopper dumping, dump hopper symbol
Dump hopper
Scrub brush with heavy down arrow, Super Scrub
Super Scrub
Hopper retracting, retract hopper symbol
Retract hopper
Scrub brush with sideways arrow, edge clean
Scrub brush edge clean
Curved black arc, variable pressure symbol
Variable pressure
Squeegee with up arrow
Squeegee up
Tank with liquid at top, recovery tank full
Recovery tank full
Squeegee with down arrow
Squeegee down
Down-pointing arrow shape, jackpoint symbol
Jackpoint
Headlight with rays, operating lights
Operating lights
Lamp with rays, hazard light
Hazard light (option)
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 11, used with permission. SES ref PF-MIZJ-ADQY‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​​⁠‍​‍‍‍‍⁠⁠‌​‌‌​‌⁠⁠​‌‌‌⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 11 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

SYMBOL DEFINITIONS

In short This page lists the symbols used on the machine's controls and what each one means. They cover circuit breakers 1 to 18, the horn, the maintenance intervals, diagnostics and several optional features.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠​​​​‌‌‌‌​‌‍‌‍‍⁠⁠‌‍‍⁠​‍
SymbolMeaning
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 1
Circuit breaker #1
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 2
Circuit breaker #2
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 3
Circuit breaker #3
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 4
Circuit breaker #4
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 5
Circuit breaker #5
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 6
Circuit breaker #6
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 7
Circuit breaker #7
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 8
Circuit breaker #8
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 9
Circuit breaker #9
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 10
Circuit breaker #10
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 11
Circuit breaker #11
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 12
Circuit breaker #12
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 13
Circuit breaker #13
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 14
Circuit breaker #14
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 15
Circuit breaker #15
SymbolMeaning
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 16
Circuit breaker #16
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 17
Circuit breaker #17
Circuit breaker symbol with the number 18
Circuit breaker #18
Horn symbol, a horn shape inside a rounded box
Horn
50 hour maintenance interval symbol showing a battery
50 hour required maintenance interval
100 hour maintenance interval symbol showing a grease gun
100 hour required maintenance interval
500 hour maintenance interval symbol showing an oil container with a drop
500 hour required maintenance interval
1000 hour maintenance interval symbol showing a bearing or ring with arrows
1000 hour required maintenance interval
Diagnostics symbol reading OK in a box
Diagnostics
Power Wand symbol showing a wand with a floor tool
Power Wand (option)
Detergent flow on symbol, a tank with drops and a downward arrow
Detergent flow on (option)
Detergent flow heavy symbol, a tank with many drops and double arrows
Detergent flow heavy (option)
Detergent flow off symbol, a tank with a cross mark below
Detergent flow off (option)
Hopper temperature indicator symbol showing a thermometer in a hopper
Hopper Temperature Indicator − Thermo Sentry
ec-H2O symbol showing a water drop in a circle
ec−H20 (option)
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 12, used with permission. SES ref PF-BV2S-NGBW‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠​​​​‌‌‌‌​‌‍‌‍‍⁠⁠‌‍‍⁠​‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 12 of 154
OPERATION

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS

In short This page labels the operator controls and instruments on the machine with letters A to R. Use the key to match each letter in the photo to the control it names.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠⁠​‌‌‍‌​​‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‍⁠​‌⁠‌⁠⁠‌
Photo of the operator control area seen from above, with lettered callouts: control panel (P), display screen (M), multi-function switches (N), TENNANT logo switch (O), horn button (A), operating lights switch (B), power kill switch (C), power wand switch (D), flap lever (E), key switch (F), directional pedal (G), steering column tilt lever (H), brake pedal (I), operator seat (J), steering wheel (K), solution flow lever (L) and FaST switch (Q)
KeyControl or instrument
AHorn button
BOperating lights switch
CPower kill switch
DPower wand switch (option)
EFlap lever
FOn/Off key switch
GDirectional pedal
HSteering column tilt lever
IBrake pedal
JOperator seat
KSteering wheel
LSolution flow lever
MDisplay screen
NMulti−function switches (6)
OTENNANT logo switch
PControl panel
QFaST switch
ec−H2O system on/off switch (option)
Rec−H2O system indicator light (option)
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 13, used with permission. SES ref PF-AJLP-R5RT‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠⁠​‌‌‍‌​​‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‍⁠​‌⁠‌⁠⁠‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 13 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

OPERATION OF CONTROLS

In short This section explains the foot pedals that run the machine. The brake pedal stops it, the parking brake pedal locks the rear wheel brakes, and the directional pedal sets travel direction and speed.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍‌​‌⁠⁠‌​‌‌‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‌​‌⁠‍⁠⁠‌

BRAKE PEDAL

The brake pedal stops the machine.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍‌​‌⁠⁠‌​‌‌‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‌​‌⁠‍⁠⁠‌

Stop: Take your foot off the directional pedal and let it return to the neutral position. Step on the brake pedal.

Photo of the foot pedal area with a white arrow pointing to the brake pedal, the smaller square pedal to the left of the larger directional pedal

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

The parking brake pedal sets and releases the rear wheel brakes.

Set: Press the brake pedal down as far as possible, then press on the parking brake pedal with the toe of your foot to lock the parking brake pedal in place.

FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine, stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine, and remove key.

Release: Press down on the brake pedal until the parking brake releases.

Photo of the foot pedal area with a white arrow pointing to the top of the brake pedal, where the parking brake pedal is pressed to lock it

DIRECTIONAL PEDAL

The directional pedal controls direction of travel and the propelling speed of the machine. You change the speed of the machine with the pressure of your foot; the harder you press the faster the machine travels.

When the machine is moving forward and the directional pedal is reversed, the machine will coast for a short distance before changing direction. Use the brake pedal to stop the machine.

Forward: Press the top of the directional pedal with the toe of your foot.

NOTE: The machine will not travel unless the operator is sitting in the operator’s seat.
Photo of the foot pedal area with a white arrow pointing to the top of the larger directional pedal
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 14, used with permission. SES ref PF-CGFH-WML5‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍‌​‌⁠⁠‌​‌‌‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‌​‌⁠‍⁠⁠‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 14 of 154
OPERATION

Reverse: Press the bottom of the directional pedal with the heel of your foot.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​‌⁠‌‍‌​‌‍‍​​‌​​‌⁠⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​

Top view of the operator's foot area showing the directional pedal with a white arrow pointing at the bottom (heel end) of the pedal, to be pressed for reverse

Neutral: Take your foot off the directional pedal and it will return to the neutral position.

Top view of the directional pedal at rest in the neutral position, with no foot on it

STEERING WHEEL

In short The steering wheel controls the direction of the machine, and the machine responds readily to steering wheel movements. Turn the wheel left to go left and right to go right.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​‌⁠‌‍‌​‌‍‍​​‌​​‌⁠⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​

The steering wheel controls the machine’s direction. The machine is very responsive to the steering wheel movements.

Left: Turn the steering wheel to the left.

Right: Turn the steering wheel to the right.

Steering wheel with the control panel behind it and a white arrow pointing left along the wheel's rim, showing the direction to turn the wheel
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 15, used with permission. SES ref PF-VND6-AAR7‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​​⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​‌⁠‌‍‌​‌‍‍​​‌​​‌⁠⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 15 of 154
OPERATION

ON-OFF KEY SWITCH

The on-off key switch controls machine power with a key.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌​​​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‌‌‍​⁠‍⁠​‍​‍‍​‌⁠​⁠‌​​​‍

FOR SAFETY: When starting machine, keep foot on brake and directional pedal in neutral.

On: Turn the key clockwise all the way.

Off: Turn the key counter-clockwise.

Photo of the machine control panel with a white arrow pointing to the on-off key switch at the lower right, below the red emergency stop button

HORN BUTTON

The horn button operates the horn.

Sound: Press the button.

Photo of the machine control panel with a white arrow pointing to the round black horn button at the top center of the panel
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 16, used with permission. SES ref PF-W2KL-GG6V‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌​​​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‌‌‍​⁠‍⁠​‍​‍‍​‌⁠​⁠‌​​​‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 16 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

POWER KILL SWITCH

In short The power kill switch cuts all power to the machine when pushed in. To restart, turn off the on/off switch, twist the power kill switch to the right to release it, then turn the machine on with the key switch.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌​‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍​⁠‍‌‍⁠​​​‌‌⁠‍‍​​‌‍⁠⁠⁠​

The power kill switch halts all power to the machine.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌​‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍​⁠‍‌‍⁠​​​‌‌⁠‍‍​​‌‍⁠⁠⁠​

FOR SAFETY: When starting machine, keep foot on brake and directional pedal in neutral.

Halt: Push the power kill switch in.

Restart: Turn off the machine with the on/off switch. Turn the power kill switch to the right to release the switch. Turn on the machine with the on/off key switch.

Machine control panel with a white arrow pointing to the round red power kill switch at the upper right, above the key switch

OPERATING LIGHTS SWITCH

The operating lights switch powers on and off the headlights and taillights.

On: Press the top of the operating lights switch.

Off: Press the bottom of the operating lights switch.

Machine control panel with a white arrow pointing to the left rocker switch, the operating lights switch, in the lower row

POWER WAND SWITCH (OPTION)

The power wand switch turns on and off the power wand solution system option.

On: Press the top of the switch.

Off: Press the bottom of the switch.

Machine control panel with a white arrow pointing to the right rocker switch, the power wand switch, in the lower row next to the key switch
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 17, used with permission. SES ref PF-5DU2-4RLA‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌​‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍​⁠‍‌‍⁠​​​‌‌⁠‍‍​​‌‍⁠⁠⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 17 of 154
OPERATION

SOLUTION FLOW LEVER

In short The solution flow lever sets how much solution goes to the floor: raise it for more, lower it for less, and all the way down to stop. It does not work when the FaST or ec−H2O system is in use.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌​‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠​​⁠​⁠‍​‌⁠⁠‍‌⁠⁠​⁠‌​

The solution flow lever controls the amount of solution flow to the floor.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌​‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠​​⁠​⁠‍​‌⁠⁠‍‌⁠⁠​⁠‌​

Increase flow: Raise the lever.

Decrease flow: Lower the lever.

Stop flow: Lower the lever all the way down.

Photo of the steering wheel and control panel with a large arrow pointing to the round black solution flow lever at the lower left of the steering column
NOTE: When using the FaST or ec−H2O system (option), the solution flow lever is nonfunctional. The FaST and ec−H2O system flow rates are pre−set. The ec−H2O module has optional flow rate settings. If solution flow adjustments are required, contact an Authorized Service Center.

STEERING COLUMN TILT LEVER

In short The tilt lever adjusts the angle of the steering column. Pull it slightly down toward the seat, set the wheel where you want it, then release the lever.

The steering column tilt lever is used to adjust the angle of the steering column. To tilt the steering column, pull the lever slightly down toward the operator seat. Position the steering wheel at the desired position, then release the lever.

Photo of the steering column and control box with an arrow pointing to the steering column tilt lever beside the steering column

FaST SWITCH

In short The FaST switch turns the Foam Scrubbing Technology system off for conventional scrubbing, or on at a low or high solution flow position. Once enabled, the scrub switch turns it on and off, and it will not start until the directional pedal is pressed.

The FaST switch enables the FaST (Foam Scrubbing Technology) system. When the FaST system is enabled, it is turned on and off with the scrub switch. Disable the FaST system before using the machine for conventional scrubbing.

Disable FaST for conventional scrubbing: Press the top of switch to the FaST system off position.

Enable the FaST system 1: Press the middle of switch to the low FaST system solution flow position.

Enable the FaST system 2: Press the bottom of the switch to the high FaST system solution flow position.

Photo of the FaST switch panel with an arrow pointing to the three-position rocker switch marked 0, 1 and 2, next to a warning label
NOTE: The FaST system will not start until the directional pedal is pressed.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 18, used with permission. SES ref PF-4GZM-VBIA‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌​‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠​​⁠​⁠‍​‌⁠⁠‍‌⁠⁠​⁠‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 18 of 154
OPERATION

ec−H2O SWITCH (OPTION)

In short The optional ec−H2O switch turns the electrically activated water system on or off with the scrub switch and sets low or high mode, or conventional scrubbing. The system will not start until the machine starts scrubbing, and only clear cool water may be in the solution tank.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​​​‍​‍​⁠‌⁠‌‌​‌‌‌‍‌​‍⁠⁠⁠‌

The ec−H2O switch (option) enables the ec−H2O (Electrically activated water) system. When the ec−H2O system is enabled, it is turned on and off with the scrub switch.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​​​‍​‍​⁠‌⁠‌‌​‌‌‌‍‌​‍⁠⁠⁠‌

Photo of the ec-H2O rocker switch on the machine panel with a white arrow pointing at the switch, next to instruction and warning labels

ec−H2O low setting: Press the top of the ec−H2O switch.

ec−H2O high setting: Place the ec−H2O switch into the middle position.

Conventional scrubbing: Press the bottom of the ec−H2O switch.

NOTE: The ec−H2O system will not start until the machine starts scrubbing.
NOTE: Do not enable the ec−H2O system with conventional cleaning detergents in the solution tank. Drain, raise and refill the solution tank with clear cool water only before operating the ec−H2O system. Conventional cleaning detergents/restorers may cause failure to the ec−H2O solution system.

CONTROL PANEL

In short The control panel runs the sweeping and scrubbing functions and shows their current state, plus a clock and a maintenance prompt. Pressing the TENNANT logo switch cycles through the function screens, where functions can be enabled or disabled.

The sweeping and scrubbing functions are activated by the control panel. Features of the control panel include six multi−function buttons and graphics icons which display the current state of the sweeping and scrubbing functions. The control panel also features a display clock for operator convenience, and a maintenance mode that prompts the operator when to perform routine machine maintenance.

Control panel with display showing icons, battery symbol, clock reading 12:16 PM and hour meter 0020, six buttons around the screen, and an arrow pointing at the TENNANT logo switch at the top
353569

By pressing the TENNANT logo switch, the operator can cycle the control panel display through the different function screens. Each function screen allows the operator to enable or disable different sweeping and scrubbing functions.

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 19, used with permission. SES ref PF-FUZZ-PGQC‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​​​‍​‍​⁠‌⁠‌‌​‌‌‌‍‌​‍⁠⁠⁠‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 19 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

CHANGING DISPLAY LANGUAGE

In short This procedure changes the language shown on the control panel display. You use the logo switch at power-up to reach the language select mode, then press the first switch to scroll to the language you want, and turn the power off to store it.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‌​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠⁠​⁠‍⁠‌‌‌⁠​‍​‍​‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍
  1. Turn the machine power off.
  2. Press and hold the logo switch.
Control panel drawing with the display screen blank and a large arrow pointing to the TENNANT logo switch at the top, with a switch and indicator dot on each side of the screen
353556
  1. Turn the machine power on.
  2. Continue pressing the logo switch for 15 seconds or until the down pressure display screen appears.
  3. Press and release the logo switch 3 times to scroll to the language select mode.
Photo of the machine control panel with the display and switches at left, and a curved arrow showing the key switch being turned to the on position
  1. Press the first switch on the control panel to scroll through the list of languages until the desired language is displayed.
  2. Turn the machine power off, and the new language will be stored in the control panel.
Control panel drawing with a large arrow pointing to the first switch at the upper left of the display, which shows the language ENGLISH followed by Enable sweep and Restrict Press.
353555
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 20, used with permission. SES ref PF-6O7C-AXKY‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‌​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠⁠​⁠‍⁠‌‌‌⁠​‍​‍​‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 20 of 154
OPERATION

BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR

In short The battery discharge indicator shows how much charge is left in the batteries. When all segments shut off, recharge the batteries; sweeping and scrubbing stop automatically.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌​‌​‍⁠​‍‍‌‌​‌​‍‌​⁠⁠‌​⁠

Batteries and chargers: make sure your charger is compatible with your batteries, and set its charging algorithm to your battery pack before you use it.

The battery discharge indicator shows the charge level of the batteries with a segmented display.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌​‌​‍⁠​‍‍‌‌​‌​‍‌​⁠⁠‌​⁠

When the batteries are fully charged, all the segments are lit. As the batteries discharge, the segments shut off.

The batteries should be recharged when all the segments have shut off. At this point, the battery icon will begin flashing, and all sweeping and scrubbing functions will automatically shut off to alert the operator of the battery condition. The squeegee and vacuum can be operated, with the rear squeegee switch, for an additional 30 seconds to pick up any excess water.

NOTE: Do not charge the batteries more often than is necessary to prolong the life of the batteries. Do not charge the batteries with a “top off” charge if there is enough remaining charge in the batteries for the next machine use. Discharge the batteries to a 20% level, when the battery discharge indicator segments shut off, before fully charging the batteries. Do not allow the batteries to become completely discharged as this will also damage the batteries. See BATTERIES in the MAINTENANCE section.
Control panel display showing the time 12:16 PM, a battery icon with segments and the hourmeter 0020; a large arrow points to the battery discharge indicator icon at the top of the display
353569

HOURMETER

In short The hourmeter records the hours the machine has been operating. It counts time while the machine is propelling or the vacuum fan is running, which is useful for maintenance.

The hourmeter records the number of hours the machine has been operating.

The hourmeter will record time when the machine is propelling or when the vacuum fan is operating. This information is useful when maintaining the machine.

Control panel display showing the time 12:16 PM, battery icon and hourmeter 0020; a large arrow points to the hourmeter reading at the lower part of the display
353570
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 21, used with permission. SES ref PF-J3JX-LCD6‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌​‌​‍⁠​‍‍‌‌​‌​‍‌​⁠⁠‌​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 21 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

DISPLAY CLOCK

In short The display clock shows the time of day below the battery discharge indicator. To set it, hold the logo switch while powering on, scroll to the adjust time mode, change the time and date with the switches, then exit and turn the key off.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠‌‍​​⁠‍‍​⁠‌⁠‍‍‍‌‌

The display clock shows the time of day below the battery discharge indicator.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠‌‍​​⁠‍‍​⁠‌⁠‍‍‍‌‌

SETTING THE DISPLAY CLOCK

  1. Turn the machine off.
  2. Press and hold the logo switch.
  3. Turn the machine power on.
  4. Continue pressing the logo switch for 15 seconds or until the down pressure display screen appears.
Display panel with the TENNANT logo, battery discharge indicator and the clock reading 12 : 16 PM; a large arrow points to the clock below the battery indicator, with a counter reading 0020 and a switch with indicator light on each side of the screen
353569
  1. Press and release the logo switch one time to scroll to the adjust time mode.
  2. Press the switch next to ADJUST TIME.
Display panel showing a menu with Input Display, Enable Edge and Adjust Time; a large arrow points to the switch next to Adjust Time at the lower left
353553
  1. Set the time, date, and choose between the 12 or 24 hour clock modes by moving the underline through the display by pressing the switches next to the direction arrows. Increase the value of the underlined segment by pressing the switch next to the positive (+) icon. Decrease the value of the underlined segment by pressing the switch next to the negative (−) icon.
  2. Exit the ADJUST TIME function by pressing the TENNANT logo switch.
  3. Turn the key to the off position.
Adjust time screen showing a plus (+) icon, a minus icon, right and left direction arrows, the time 12 : 00 AM with the underline, the date 01 / 01 / 97 and the 12 hour mode setting
353557
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 22, used with permission. SES ref PF-TVDE-6EOT‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠‌‍​​⁠‍‍​⁠‌⁠‍‍‍‌‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 22 of 154
OPERATION

SCRUB SWITCH

In short The scrub switch starts and stops scrubbing and also sets the scrub brush pressure. Press it to start or stop, and press and hold it to scroll through the brush pressure settings.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠​​⁠​‌‍⁠‌⁠‌​​‍​​‌​⁠‌‌⁠​

The scrub switch controls the scrubbing operations. The scrub switch also sets the scrub brush pressure.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠​​⁠​‌‍⁠‌⁠‌​​‍​​‌​⁠‌‌⁠​

The scrubbing operations include the following: The scrub head lowers and the scrub brushes turn on. The rear squeegee will lower and the vacuum fan will start. The optional sweeping side brush(es) lowers and the sweeping brushes turn on. The solution system will start, if the solution flow lever is on. The optional FaST, ec−H20, or ES system and detergent pump will start, if the switches are on.

Control panel with a large arrow pointing at the scrub switch and its flashing indicator light, next to the display showing the brush, battery, solution and ES icons under the Tennant logo
353551

Start scrubbing: Press the scrub switch. The indicator light next to the switch will illuminate. The scrubbing system will start when the machine moves forward.

NOTE: The brush pressure setting, the FaST / ec−H20 system, the detergent flow rate, the edge scrub, and the ES system will default to the last setting used when the scrubbing operations are started again.

Stop scrubbing: Press the scrub switch. The indicator light next to the switch will go off. First the scrub brushes will stop and raise, then the rear squeegee will raise and the vacuum will shut off.

Scrub brush pressure: Press and hold the scrub switch. The brush pressure will scroll through three settings indicated by the small arrows above the brush icon. Each arrow indicates a heavier brush pressure setting.

Close-up of the scrub switch and the display, with a circle and arrow marking the three small arrows above the brush icon that show brush pressure
353567

There is also a fourth brush pressure setting indicated by one large arrow above the brush icon. It is the heaviest brush pressure setting, and it is called Super Scrub. It is activated for 30 seconds by pressing the scrub switch twice quickly.

The pressure setting selected when the scrub switch is released will be the new default brush pressure setting.

Control panel with an arrow pointing to the single large arrow above the brush icon on the display, indicating the Super Scrub pressure setting
353571
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 23, used with permission. SES ref PF-LRAT-KAOX‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠​​⁠​‌‍⁠‌⁠‌​​‍​​‌​⁠‌‌⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 23 of 154
OPERATION

Under normal conditions, the brush pressure should be set in the minimum settings (one or two downward arrows). Under heavy grime conditions, the brush pressure should be set in the maximum settings (three downward arrows or one large arrow). Travel speed and floor conditions will affect the scrubbing performance.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​​​‌‌‌⁠​⁠⁠​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌​⁠​‌⁠‌

NOTE: The rear squeegee will raise and the vacuum will shut off when the machine travels in reverse. The squeegee will lower and the vacuum starts again when the machine travels forward.
NOTE: The scrub brushes will stop when the machine is stopped for a short time. The brushes will start again when the machine travels forward.
NOTE: The scrub switch also controls the FaST/ec−H2O system (option) when the FaST/ec−H2O system is enabled with the FaST/ec−H2O switch.

RECOVERY TANK FULL INDICATOR

In short The recovery tank full indicator lights when the recovery tank is full. If it stays on for more than 7 seconds, the scrub brushes and vacuum shut off and the rear squeegee raises. You can press and hold the rear squeegee switch to pick up excess water.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​​​‌‌‌⁠​⁠⁠​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌​⁠​‌⁠‌

The recovery tank full indicator comes on when the recovery tank is full.

If the recovery tank full indicator stays on for more than 7 seconds, the “Rec. Tank Full” message will appear in the hourmeter display. The scrub brushes and vacuum will shut off, and the rear squeegee will raise.

To pick up excess water after the vacuum has shut off and the rear squeegee has raised, press and hold the rear squeegee switch.

Control panel display with the Tennant logo, indicator lights and buttons on both sides, and a large arrow pointing to the recovery tank full indicator icon in the screen
353572
NOTE: Do not overfill the recovery tank. Overfilling the recovery tank may damage the vacuum fans.

ES SWITCH (OPTION)

In short The optional ES (Extended Scrub) switch turns the solution recycling system on and off. Press the switch to turn it on, with its indicator light lit, and press again to turn it off. The recovery tank must be half full to use the ES option.

The ES (Extended Scrub) switch turns on and off the solution recycling system. When the scrubbing functions have started, the ES will default to the last setting used.

On: Press the switch. The indicator light next to the switch will illuminate.

Off: Press the switch. The indicator light next to the switch will go off.

NOTE: The ES icon only appears after the scrub functions have been activated.
Control panel display with the Tennant logo and indicator lights, and a large arrow pointing to the ES icon and the ES switch at the lower right of the screen
353570
NOTE: The recovery tank must be half full to use the ES option.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 24, used with permission. SES ref PF-ULT4-K2NT‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​​​‌‌‌⁠​⁠⁠​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌​⁠​‌⁠‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 24 of 154
OPERATION

EDGE SCRUB SWITCH

In short The edge scrub switch moves the scrub head to the right for close edge scrubbing on machines with MaxPro 1000 scrub heads. Press it during normal scrubbing to turn it on, and press it again to turn it off.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠‌​⁠‍‍⁠⁠‍​‌⁠‍​‌⁠‌⁠​⁠‍‍

The edge scrub switch extends the scrub head, on machines equipped with the MaxPro 1000 scrub heads, to the right to allow close edge scrubbing. When the scrubbing functions have started, the edge scrub will default to the last setting used.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠‌​⁠‍‍⁠⁠‍​‌⁠‍​‌⁠‌⁠​⁠‍‍

NOTE: The edge scrub icon only appears after the scrub functions have been activated.

On: Press the switch during normal scrubbing. The indicator light next to the switch will illuminate.

Control panel drawing with the Tennant logo at the top, a display screen with scrub, battery, sun and tank icons, and three switches with indicator lights at the left; a large arrow points to the middle left switch, the edge scrub switch, whose indicator light is shown lit
353570

Off: Press the switch again. The indicator light next to the switch will go off.

REAR SQUEEGEE SWITCH

In short The rear squeegee switch controls the vacuum fan and the rear squeegee position. Press it to lower the squeegee and start the fan, and press it again to raise the squeegee and stop the fan.

The rear squeegee switch controls the vacuum fan and the position of the rear squeegee. The rear squeegee can be operated separately from the scrub brushes for the purpose of picking-up excess water without scrubbing, or double scrubbing without water pick up

Lower squeegee and start the vacuum fan: Press the squeegee switch. The indicator light next to the switch will illuminate.

Raise squeegee and stop the vacuum fan: Press the squeegee switch. The indicator light next to the switch will go off. There will be a slight delay before the vacuum shuts off.

Control panel drawing with the Tennant logo at the top, a display screen with scrub, battery, sun and tank icons, and three switches with indicator lights at the left; a large arrow points to the lower left switch, the rear squeegee switch, whose indicator light is shown lit
353570
NOTE: The rear squeegee lowers and scrubbing vacuum starts automatically when the scrubbing operations start.
NOTE: The rear squeegee will raise and the scrubbing vacuum will shut off after a short delay when the machine travels in reverse.
NOTE: The rear squeegee will raise and the scrubbing vacuum fan will shut off after a short delay when the scrubbing operations are shut off.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 25, used with permission. SES ref PF-DYTY-BTLL‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠‌​⁠‍‍⁠⁠‍​‌⁠‍​‌⁠‌⁠​⁠‍‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 25 of 154
OPERATION

SWEEP SWITCH

In short The sweep switch starts and stops sweeping. Pressing it lowers and starts the main brush, vacuum fan and side brush, and sweeping begins once the machine moves forward.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‍​⁠​⁠‍​​‍⁠​‍​​‍‍​⁠​‍‌​

The sweep switch controls the sweeping operations.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‍​⁠​⁠‍​​‍⁠​‍​​‍‍​⁠​‍‌​

If the sweep switch is pressed while the machine is idle or in the scrub mode, the main sweeping brush will lower and activate, the sweep vacuum fan will activate, and the side brush will lower and activate.

Start sweeping: Press the sweep switch. The indicator light next to the switch will illuminate. The sweeping system will start when the machine moves forward.

Control panel with Tennant logo and display icons; a large arrow points to the sweep switch at the upper right, whose indicator lights are lit, with the other indicator lights nearby
353573

Stop sweeping: Press the sweep switch. The indicator light next to the switch will go off. First, the side and main sweeping brushes will stop and raise, then the vacuum will shut off.

NOTE: If the hopper is raised, even slightly, the raised hopper icon will replace the sweep icon on the control panel display and the sweeping operations will not start.

SIDE BRUSH SWITCH

In short The side brush switch lowers and runs the side brush, or raises and stops it. The main sweeping brush must be operating for the side brush to work.

The side brush switch controls the side brush position and rotation. The main sweeping brush must be operating for the side brush to work.

NOTE: The side brush operates automatically when the main sweeping brush starts operating. To sweep without using the side brush, press the side brush switch.

Down and On: Press the side brush switch. The indicator light next to the switch will illuminate, then the side brush will lower and activate.

Control panel with Tennant logo and display icons; a large arrow points to the side brush switch in the middle right, with its indicator light lit
353573

Up and Off: Press the side brush switch. The indicator light next to the switch will go out, then the side brush will stop and raise.

NOTE: If the hopper is raised, even slightly, the raised hopper icon will replace the sweep icon on the control panel display and the sweeping operations will not start.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 26, used with permission. SES ref PF-ZOWM-JHNV‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‍​⁠​⁠‍​​‍⁠​‍​​‍‍​⁠​‍‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 26 of 154
OPERATION

FILTER SHAKER SWITCH

In short The filter shaker switch shakes the hopper filter for 10 seconds to clear dust. Press it if the machine starts making too much dust while sweeping.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‍⁠​‌‍‌​‍​‍⁠‍‍‍‌⁠‌‍

The filter shaker switch starts the hopper filter shaker. The shaker automatically operates for 10 seconds.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‍⁠​‌‍‌​‍​‍⁠‍‍‍‌⁠‌‍

NOTE: If the machine begins to create an excessive amount of dust while sweeping, press the filter shaker switch.

Start : Press the filter shaker switch. The filter shaker indicator light will turn on, and the sweeping vacuum fan will turn off while the filter shaker is operating.

NOTE: The filter shaker will activate automatically for ten seconds each time the sweeping operations are stopped. The vacuum system will not operate while the filter shaker is operating.
Control panel with the Tennant logo and a display of icons; a large arrow points to the filter shaker switch button on the left side, with its indicator light shown lit
353573

VACUUM FAN SWITCH

In short The vacuum fan switch starts and stops the sweep vacuum fan, which should not be used when sweeping in wet conditions. The fan will not start while the hopper is raised.

The vacuum fan switch starts and stops the sweep vacuum fan. Do not operate the vacuum fan when sweeping in wet conditions.

Start: Press the vacuum fan switch. The indicator light next to the switch will illuminate.

Stop: Press the switch. The indicator light next to the switch will go out.

NOTE: The sweep vacuum fan activates automatically when the main sweeping brush starts operating. The sweep vacuum fan will not activate unless the main sweeping brush is operating.
NOTE: The sweep vacuum fan will not start if the hopper is raised, even slightly. If the sweep vacuum fan switch is pressed while the hopper is raised, the sweep vacuum will not start and the raised hopper icon will appear on the control panel.
Control panel with the Tennant logo and a display of icons; a large arrow points to the vacuum fan switch button at the lower right, with its indicator light shown lit
353574
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 27, used with permission. SES ref PF-U3C3-PDNN‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‍⁠​‌‍‌​‍​‍⁠‍‍‍‌⁠‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 27 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

HOPPER TEMPERATURE INDICATOR – THERMO SENTRY

In short The hopper temperature indicator warns of too much heat, possibly a fire, in the hopper. When it comes on, move the machine to a safe location, open the hopper and remove the source of heat, then turn the machine off and back on to reset the Thermo Sentry.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​‍​‌​‍⁠‍‌​⁠‍⁠‍⁠⁠‍​‍‍⁠​⁠⁠

The hopper temperature indicator comes on when the Thermo Sentry indicates too much heat, possibly a fire, in the hopper.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​‍​‌​‍⁠‍‌​⁠‍⁠‍⁠⁠‍​‍‍⁠​⁠⁠

An audible alarm will sound for five seconds and the hopper temperature indicator will appear on the display screen. The Thermo Sentry will stop all sweeping functions.

If this occurs, drive the machine to a safe location, open the hopper and eliminate the source of heat. Turn the machine off and back on to reset the Thermo Sentry.

Control panel with the Tennant logo and display screen; a large arrow points to the hopper temperature thermometer icon on the display, and the lower right switch indicator light is flashing
353574

HOPPER RAISE SWITCH

In short The hopper raise switch lifts the hopper. Press and hold it until the hopper reaches the height you want, then release it to hold that position.

The hopper raise switch raises the hopper.

Raise hopper: Press and hold the hopper raise switch until the hopper is in the desired raised position.

Hold: Release the hopper raise switch.

Control panel with display screen; a large arrow points to the flashing lower right switch beside the hopper raise icon on the display
353569

HOPPER LOWER SWITCH

In short The hopper lower switch lowers the hopper. Press and hold it until the hopper is fully closed; the hopper retracts automatically as it is lowered.

The hopper lower switch lowers the hopper.

Lower hopper: Press and hold the hopper lower switch until the hopper is in the fully closed position.

NOTE: The hopper will retract automatically when the hopper is lowered.
Control panel with display screen; a large arrow points to the flashing bottom right switch beside the hopper lower icon on the display
353569
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 28, used with permission. SES ref PF-FN5J-ONMQ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​‍​‌​‍⁠‍‌​⁠‍⁠‍⁠⁠‍​‍‍⁠​⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 28 of 154
OPERATION

HOPPER DUMP SWITCH

In short The hopper dump switch tilts the hopper forward so the debris can be dumped. Press and hold it until the hopper is tilted all the way forward.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠​​‌‍‌​‌​​‌⁠​‌​‌​‌⁠‍‍​⁠

The hopper dump switch tilts the hopper forward to dump the debris.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠​​‌‍‌​‌​​‌⁠​‌​‌​‌⁠‍‍​⁠

Dump hopper: Press and hold the hopper dump switch until the hopper is tilted all the way forward.

Control panel with the Tennant logo and display screen; a large black arrow points at the upper left switch, which has a flashing indicator light beside it, showing the hopper dump switch to press
353574

HOPPER RETRACT SWITCH

In short The hopper retract switch tilts the hopper back to the upright position. Press and hold it until the hopper is tilted all the way back.

The hopper retract switch tilts the hopper back to the upright position.

Retract hopper: Press and hold the hopper retract switch until the hopper is tilted all the way back.

Control panel with the Tennant logo and display screen; a large black arrow points at the lower left switch, which has a flashing indicator light beside it, showing the hopper retract switch to press
353574
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 29, used with permission. SES ref PF-TABI-W5E4‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠​​‌‍‌​‌​​‌⁠​‌​‌​‌⁠‍‍​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 29 of 154
OPERATION

DETERGENT PUMP SWITCH (OPTION)

In short The detergent pump switch sets how much detergent flows to the floor while scrubbing: high, low or off. It only works when the main scrub brushes are active and the solution flow lever is on.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‌​‌‍⁠‍⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌​‌‍‍‍​​‌​‌⁠

The detergent pump switch controls the amount of detergent that flows to the floor while scrubbing. When the scrubbing functions have started, the detergent pump switch will default to the last setting used.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‌​‌‍⁠‍⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌​‌‍‍‍​​‌​‌⁠

NOTE: The detergent icon only appears after the scrub functions have been activated.
NOTE: The detergent pump switch will not activate unless the main scrub brushes are active and the solution flow lever is on.

High: Press and hold the detergent pump switch until two downward pointing arrows appear on the icon next to the switch. Release the switch. The indicator light next to the switch will illuminate.

Low: Press and hold the detergent pump switch until one downward pointing arrow appears on the icon next to the switch. Release the switch. The indicator light next to the switch will illuminate.

Off: Press and release the detergent pump switch. An 'X' will appear under the detergent pump icon. The indicator light next to the switch will go off.

NOTE: When using the ec−H2O system (option), the detergent pump switch is nonfunctional.
Control panel with the Tennant logo at the top, a display screen with scrub, battery, solution and ES icons, and switches with indicator lights on both sides; a large black arrow points at the upper right switch next to the detergent pump icon
353551
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 30, used with permission. SES ref PF-YRPR-OHZL‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‌​‌‍⁠‍⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌​‌‍‍‍​​‌​‌⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 30 of 154
OPERATION

MAINTENANCE MODE

In short Maintenance mode lets the operator watch and reset the elapsed time for the four regular maintenance requirements. To reset a timer, turn the machine off, hold the logo switch while powering on, and step through the screens to DISPLAY MAINT.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‌​​‌‌​‍⁠⁠‍​‌​‌​‍​‌‌‍⁠‌

The maintenance mode allows the operator to monitor and reset the elapsed time between the four different regular maintenance requirements.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‌​​‌‌​‍⁠⁠‍​‌​‌​‍​‌‌‍⁠‌

When the maintenance mode is enabled, an alarm will sound, and one of several service maintenance icons will appear on the display each time the machine is started. This will happen if one or more of the maintenance timers goes past its recommended interval. Each time the required maintenance function is performed, the timer for that function should be reset.

Display panel with the Tennant logo, showing a service maintenance icon (an oil drop in a container) with a large arrow pointing at it, a brush/scrub symbol, and an hour counter reading 0020
353558

RESETTING THE MAINTENANCE TIMERS

  1. Turn the machine off.
  2. Press and hold the logo switch.
  3. Turn the machine power on.
  4. Continue pressing the logo switch for 15 seconds or until the down pressure display screen appears.
  5. Press and release the logo switch two more times. The SELF TEST screen will appear on the display.
Display panel showing the time 12:16 PM, a battery symbol and hour counter 0020, with a large arrow pointing at the Tennant logo switch at the top of the panel
353558
  1. Press the switch next to DISPLAY MAINT.
Display panel showing the menu Self Test, Display Maint. and Enable Maint., with a large arrow pointing to the flashing switch next to Display Maint.
353560
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 31, used with permission. SES ref PF-VODB-E264‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‌​​‌‌​‍⁠⁠‍​‌​‌​‍​‌‌‍⁠‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 31 of 154
OPERATION

Each maintenance item is represented by an icon with the recommended maintenance interval printed in hours below it. The lower right\u2212hand corner of the screen displays the number of hours that have elapsed since the maintenance timer was last reset and the date it was last reset. The switch at the upper right\u2212hand corner of the screen will reset the hour counter for each maintenance item. Reset the maintenance timer each time the maintenance function represented by the icon is performed. The operator can scroll through the four maintenance function screens by pressing the logo switch.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍​​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​‌​‍‍‌​‍​‍‍​⁠​‌⁠‍​​​​‍

Maintenance display panel with the Tennant logo at the top and a large arrow pointing to it, a screen showing an oil-can icon with 800 hours below it, 0 with an arrow and hourglass, elapsed hours 0020 and date 01 / 01 / 97, with a switch and indicator light on each side
353559

To determine which routine maintenance function each icon represents, see the SYMBOL DEFINITIONS section of this manual.

  1. Exit the DISPLAY MAINT. function by pressing the logo switch until all four maintenance mode screens have been displayed.
  2. Turn the key to the off position.
Maintenance display panel with the Tennant logo at the top and a large arrow pointing to it, a screen showing an oil-can icon with 800 hours below it, 0 with an arrow and hourglass, elapsed hours 0020 and date 01 / 01 / 97, with a switch and indicator light on each side
353559
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 32, used with permission. SES ref PF-ABXJ-5JPS‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍​​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​‌​‍‍‌​‍​‍‍​⁠​‌⁠‍​​​​‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 32 of 154
OPERATION

DISABLING THE MAINTENANCE MODE

In short This procedure turns off the maintenance mode, so the flashing icon and alarm no longer appear when a maintenance timer is past its interval. You hold the logo switch while powering on, step through the screens to the SELF TEST screen, then press the switch next to ENABLE MAINT.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌​⁠‌​‌⁠‌‍⁠​‍‍‍​‍‍‌‍‍​‍⁠​

When the maintenance mode is disabled, the flashing icon and alarm will not appear and sound when the machine is started if one or more of the maintenance timers goes past its recommended interval.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌​⁠‌​‌⁠‌‍⁠​‍‍‍​‍‍‌‍‍​‍⁠​

  1. Turn the machine off.
  2. Press and hold the logo switch.
  3. Turn the machine power on.
  4. Continue pressing the logo switch for 15 seconds or until the down pressure display screen appears.
  5. Press and release the logo switch two more times. The SELF TEST screen will appear on the display.
Control panel with the Tennant logo switch at the top and a large arrow pointing to it; the display shows a time of 12:16 PM and the number 0020, with a switch and indicator light on each side of the display
353550
  1. Press the switch next to ENABLE MAINT..
NOTE: If the light next to the ENABLE MAINT. switch is not illuminated, the maintenance mode is currently disabled.
NOTE: When the maintenance mode is disabled, the maintenance timers continue to record the elapsed time between maintenance intervals. To view the elapsed time between each of the six default maintenance intervals, press the switch next to Display Maint.. Press the logo switch to scroll through the maintenance function screens.
Control panel display showing the Self Test, Display Maint. and Enable Maint. options, with an arrow pointing to the lit switch beside Enable Maint. at the lower left of the display
353560
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 33, used with permission. SES ref PF-WXDZ-VV7G‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌​⁠‌​‌⁠‌‍⁠​‍‍‍​‍‍‌‍‍​‍⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 33 of 154
OPERATION

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

In short Circuit breakers are resettable devices that stop current flow when a circuit overloads. After a breaker trips and cools down, reset it by pressing or flipping its reset button. The chart lists each breaker, its rating and the circuit it protects.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍​‍​​​‌​⁠​​​‍‍‌⁠⁠​​⁠‌‌​‍​⁠‌​​‍⁠‍⁠⁠⁠

The circuit breakers are resettable electrical circuit protection devices. They stop the flow of current in the event of a circuit overload. Once a circuit breaker is tripped, reset it manually by pressing / flipping the reset button after the breaker has cooled down.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍​‍​​​‌​⁠​​​‍‍‌⁠⁠​​⁠‌‌​‍​⁠‌​​‍⁠‍⁠⁠⁠

If the overload that caused the circuit breaker to trip is still there, the circuit breaker will continue to stop current flow until the problem is corrected.

The circuit breakers are located to the left of the operator’s compartment next to the vacuum fans.

The charts shows the circuit breakers and fuses, and the electrical components they protect.

Photo of the circuit breaker panel with two white arrows pointing to the breaker block and the electrical components above it, beside the vacuum fans
Close-up of the circuit breaker panel showing two rows of numbered reset buttons with an arrow pointing at the upper left breaker
Circuit BreakerRatingCircuit Protected
CB115 ASweeper/Hopper Controls
CB220 ASweeper Vacuum Fan Motor
CB330 ASweeper Brush Motor
CB415 APower Wand/Sweeping Side Brush
CB52.5 AKey Switch
CB650 ARight Scrub Motor (000000−003545)
CB6Open (003546− )
CB750 ALeft Scrub Motor (000000−003545)
CB7Open (003546− )
CB815 ALights
CB92.5 AHorn
CB1020 AVac Fan #1 (000000−003545)
CB1030 AVac Fan #1 (003546− )
CB1120 AVac Fan #2 (000000−003545)
CB1130 AVac Fan #2 (003546− )
CB1225 AControl Board
CB1350 ACenter Scrub Motor (000000−003545)
CB13Open (003546− )
CB1440 APower Steering Pump
CB1510 AFaST System
Photo of the FaST system switch panel with a three-position rocker switch and a white arrow pointing to the round reset button below it, next to a flammable materials warning label
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 34, used with permission. SES ref PF-2SJQ-3GZO‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍​‍​​​‌​⁠​​​‍‍‌⁠⁠​​⁠‌‌​‍​⁠‌​​‍⁠‍⁠⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 34 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

This chart shows the magnetic circuit breakers used on machines serial number 003546 and up for all cylindrical scrub heads.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠‍​‍‍⁠‍‍⁠⁠‌​‍⁠​⁠‌‍​‍​‍

Circuit BreakerRatingCircuit Protected
CB645Right Scrub Motor
CB745Left Scrub Motor
CB13Open

This chart shows the magnetic circuit breakers used on machines serial number 003546 and up with Max Pro 1000 standard motor disk scrub heads.

Circuit BreakerRatingCircuit Protected
CB640Right Scrub Motor
CB740Left Scrub Motor
CB13Open

This chart shows the magnetic circuit breakers used on machines serial number 003546 and up with Max Pro 1000 heavy duty motor disk scrub heads.

Circuit BreakerRatingCircuit Protected
CB645Right Scrub Motor
CB745Left Scrub Motor
CB13Open

This chart shows the magnetic circuit breakers used on machines serial number 003546 and up with Max Pro 1200 disk scrub heads.

Circuit BreakerRatingCircuit Protected
CB640Right Scrub Motor
CB740Left Scrub Motor
CB1340Center Scrub Motor

This chart shows the magnetic circuit breakers used on machines with an ec−H20 system.

Circuit BreakerRatingCircuit Protected
CB162.0Water Valve
CB172.0ec−H20 Module
CB182.0Solution Pump
Photo of the circuit breaker block marked 6, 7 and 13 above the control panel, with white arrows pointing to the breakers
Photo of the machine electrical compartment with a white arrow pointing to the small circuit breaker panel on the right
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 35, used with permission. SES ref PF-5ISO-25XH‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠‍​‍‍⁠‍‍⁠⁠‌​‍⁠​⁠‌‍​‍​‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 35 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

FUSES

In short Fuses are one-time devices that stop current flow when a circuit overloads. The page lists where the main propelling fuse and the two actuator fuses are located and what each one protects, and says never to use a higher value fuse than specified.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‌‌‍⁠‌​‍‌‌​‌​​‌‌

The fuses are one-time circuit protection devices designed to stop the flow of current in the event of a circuit overload. Never substitute higher value fuses than those specified in this manual.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‌‌‍⁠‌​‍‌‌​‌​​‌‌

The main propelling fuse is located under the circuit breakers in the electrical panel.
The two actuator fuses are located in the control panel.

Photo of the electrical panel area with a large white arrow pointing down at the panel of circuit breakers, showing where the main propelling fuse is located beneath them
FuseRatingCircuit Protected
FU 1200 APropelling
FU 210 AElectronic Actuator
FU 310 AElectronic Actuator
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 36, used with permission. SES ref PF-NRDG-OBEO‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠⁠‌‌‌‍⁠‌​‍‌‌​‌​​‌‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 36 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

SOLUTION TANK DRAIN HOSE

In short This section explains how to drain the solution tank through its drain hose. Remove the drain hose cap from the tank access cap, pull out the hose and take off the end cap.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​‌⁠‌​‍⁠⁠‍‌‍​‍‌⁠‍‌‍​‌⁠​

The solution tank drain hose is used to drain the solution tank. Drain the solution tank by removing the drain hose cap from the tank access cap. Pull out the solution tank hose and remove the drain hose end cap.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​‌⁠‌​‍⁠⁠‍‌‍​‍‌⁠‍‌‍​‌⁠​

Photo of the solution tank drain hose with its cap seated in the tank access opening on the side of the machine, with a white arrow pointing to the capped hose

RECOVERY TANK DRAIN HOSE

In short This section explains how to drain the recovery tank through its drain hose. Remove the drain hose cap from the tank access cap, pull out the hose and take off the end cap.

The recovery tank drain hose is used to drain the recovery tank. Drain the recovery tank by removing the drain hose cap from the tank access cap. Pull out the recovery tank hose and remove the drain hose end cap.

Photo of the recovery tank drain hose with its cap seated in the tank access opening, with a white arrow pointing to the capped hose

POSITIVE SOLUTION CONTROL DRAIN (OPTION)

In short This section covers the optional positive solution control drain. Remove the dust cap, connect the drain hose to the drain and pull the lever to open the valve.

For machines with the positive solution control drain option, remove the dust cap. Connect the drain hose to the solution control drain and open the drain valve by pulling the lever.

Photo of the positive solution control drain fitting with its dust cap and chain at the lower machine frame, with a white arrow pointing to the fitting and the valve lever below it
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 37, used with permission. SES ref PF-5EMM-LY6U‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​‌⁠‌​‍⁠⁠‍‌‍​‍‌⁠‍‌‍​‌⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 37 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

SIDE BRUSH ADJUSTMENT KNOB

In short The side brush adjustment knob sets how much the side brush contacts the surface being swept. Turn it counter-clockwise to increase contact and clockwise to decrease it.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​​​‌‍‍‍‍‌‌‍‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌‌‌‌‌‍‍‍‍

The side brush adjustment knob controls the amount of contact the side brush has with the surface being swept.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​​​‌‍‍‍‍‌‌‍‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌‌‌‌‌‍‍‍‍

Increase: Turn the side brush adjustment knob counter−clockwise.

Decrease: Turn the side brush adjustment knob clockwise.

Photo of the side brush area with an arrow pointing to the side brush adjustment knob on the bracket above the side brush

FRONT FLAP LEVER

In short The front flap lever opens the flap in front of the main sweeping brush so larger debris can be swept into the hopper. Pull it back to raise the flap and push it forward to lower the flap.

The front flap lever opens the front flap in front of the main sweeping brush, allowing larger debris to be trapped and swept up into the hopper.

Raise front flap: Pull the front flap lever back.

Lower front flap: Push the front flap lever forward.

Photo of the operator control area with an arrow pointing down to the front flap lever, a curved black-handled lever beside the control panel

HOPPER SUPPORT BAR

In short The hopper support bar, on the right hand side of the machine, holds the hopper in the raised position. Engage it whenever working under the hopper rather than relying on the machine.

The hopper support bar is located on the right hand side of the machine. When working under the hopper, engage the hopper support bar to hold the hopper in the raised position. Do not rely on the machine to hold the hopper in the raised position.

WARNING: Raised hopper may fall. Engage hopper support bar.
WARNING: Lift arm pinch point. Stay clear of hopper lift arms.
Photo of a hand holding the hopper support bar on the right side of the machine, with an arrow pointing to the bar
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 38, used with permission. SES ref PF-XLGE-XAHY‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​​​‌‍‍‍‍‌‌‍‍⁠⁠‍⁠‌‌‌‌‌‍‍‍‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 38 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATOR SEAT

In short The standard operator seat slides forward and backward using a lever. The machine will not travel unless the operator is sitting in the seat.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‌‌‌‌⁠​‍‌‌⁠​​‍‌‍⁠​⁠‍‌‍‌​

The operator seat is a fixed back style with a forward-backward adjustment.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‌‌‌‌⁠​‍‌‌⁠​​‍‌‍⁠​⁠‍‌‍‌​

Adjust: Pull the lever outward and slide the seat to the desired position, then release the lever.

NOTE: The machine will not travel unless the operator is sitting in the operator’s seat.
Operator seat with a white arrow pointing to the seat adjustment lever at the front underside of the seat, steering wheel behind it

DELUXE SUSPENSION SEAT (OPTION)

The deluxe suspension seat has four adjustments. The adjustments are for the lumbar support, backrest angle, operator weight adjustment and front−to−back adjustment.

The lumbar adjustment knob controls the firmness of the lumbar support.

Increase firmness: Turn knob clockwise.

Decrease firmness: Turn knob counterclockwise.

Deluxe suspension seat from the side with a white arrow pointing to the lumbar adjustment knob on the side of the backrest

The backrest angle knob adjusts the angle of the backrest.

Increase angle: Turn the angle adjustment knob counterclockwise.

Decrease angle: Turn the angle adjustment knob clockwise.

Deluxe suspension seat from the side with a white arrow pointing to the backrest angle adjustment knob at the lower side of the seat
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 39, used with permission. SES ref PF-VAE7-W3II‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‌‌‌‌⁠​‍‌‌⁠​​‍‌‍⁠​⁠‍‌‍‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 39 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

In short This page shows how to adjust the operator's seat. The weight adjustment knob sets seat firmness, and the front-to-back adjustment lever sets the seat position.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌‌⁠​​⁠⁠​‍​‌​⁠​⁠​​​‍‌​‌‍

The weight adjustment knob controls the firmness of the operator’s seat.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌‌⁠​​⁠⁠​‍​‌​⁠​⁠​​​‍‌​‌‍

Increase firmness: Turn the weight adjustment knob clockwise.

Decrease firmness: Turn the weight adjustment knob counterclockwise.

Operator's seat seen from the side with a white arrow pointing to the weight adjustment knob under the seat cushion

Use the gauge next to the weight adjustment knob to help determine proper seat firmness for the operator.

Operator's seat with a white arrow pointing to the gauge next to the weight adjustment knob under the seat

The front−to−back adjustment lever adjusts the seat position.

Adjust: Pull the lever out and slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever.

Operator's seat with a white arrow pointing to the front-to-back adjustment lever beneath the seat
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 40, used with permission. SES ref PF-EE53-5F3N‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌‌⁠​​⁠⁠​‍​‌​⁠​⁠​​​‍‌​‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 40 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

HOW THE MACHINE WORKS

In short This section explains how the steering wheel and pedals control the machine and how its sweeping and scrubbing parts work together. It also lists the scrub head types and widths that are available.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌‌‍‌‍‍‌‍‍⁠⁠‌‍

The steering wheel controls the direction of machine travel. The directional pedal controls the speed and forward/reverse directions. The brake pedal slows and stops the machine.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌‌‍‌‍‍‌‍‍⁠⁠‌‍

The machine consists of separate sweeping and scrubbing components.

The sweeping components of the machine are a debris hopper, hopper dust filter, sweeping brushes and a cylindrical conveyor.

The side brush sweeps debris into the path of the main sweeping brush. The main brush sweeps debris from the floor and up the the cylindrical conveyor. The cylindrical conveyor lifts the debris up into the hopper. The vacuum system pulls dust and air through the hopper and hopper dust filter.

The scrub components of the machine are a solution tank, scrub brushes, rear and side squeegees, a vacuum system, and a recovery tank.

Water and detergent, from the solution tank, flow to the floor through a solution valve to the scrub brushes. The brushes scrub the floor. As the machine is moved forward the squeegees wipe the dirty solution off the floor, which is then picked up and drawn into the recovery tank.

When using the ES mode, the solution in the recovery tank is filtered and returned to the solution tank to be reused.

The five available scrub head types use disk or cylindrical brushes.

Two different widths of scrub heads are available for each type.
The MaxPro 1000 disk scrub head contains two disk scrub brushes, and is available with standard or heavy duty scrubbing motors. The MaxPro 1000 disk scrub head is 1016 mm (40 in).
The MaxPro 1200 disk scrub head contains three disk scrub brushes, and is 1220 mm (48 in).

The MaxPro 1000 cylindrical scrub head is 1016 mm (40 in).
The MaxPro 1200 cylindrical scrub head is 1220 mm (48 in).

NOTE: The amount and type of soilage play an important role in determining the type of brushes to be used. For specific recommendations, contact your TENNANT service representative.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 41, used with permission. SES ref PF-C3UK-35TS‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‍⁠⁠‍⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌‌‍‌‍‍‌‍‍⁠⁠‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 41 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

When finished sweeping and scrubbing, clean the hopper dust filter, empty the hopper, and drain and clean the recovery tank. If using the ES system, drain and clean the solution tank, and clean the ES filter.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠⁠⁠‍​‌⁠‌‍‌⁠‍‌‌​⁠⁠‍​⁠⁠⁠⁠

FaST SCRUBBING SYSTEM

In short The FaST system scrubs with a foam made from FaST PAK concentrate, a small amount of water and compressed air. Use only clear cool water in the solution tank with it, never conventional cleaning detergents.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠⁠⁠‍​‌⁠‌‍‌⁠‍‌‌​⁠⁠‍​⁠⁠⁠⁠

Unlike conventional scrubbing, the FaST (Foam Scrubbing Technology) system operates by injecting the FaST PAK concentrate agent into the system with a small amount of water and compressed air. This mixture creates a large volume of expanded wet foam.

Photo of the machine's FaST components with a white arrow pointing to the FaST unit mounted among hoses, wiring and brackets

The expanded foam mixture is then dispersed onto the floor while the machine is scrubbing. When the squeegee picks up the mixture, the patented foaming agent has collapsed and is recovered into the recovery tank.

The FaST system can be used with all double scrubbing and heavy duty scrubbing applications.

Using the FaST system can increase productivity by 30% by reducing your dump/fill cycle. It will also reduce chemical usage and storage space. One FaST PAK of concentrated agent can scrub up to 1 million sq. ft.

NOTE: Do not enable the FaST system with conventional cleaning detergents in the solution tank. Drain, raise and refill the solution tank with clear cool water only before operating the FaST system. Conventional cleaning detergents/restorers may cause failure to the FaST solution system.
NOTE: Storage or transporting machines equipped with FaST in freezing temperatures requires special procedures. Check with a TENNANT representative for advice.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 42, used with permission. SES ref PF-XGLG-ZFNW‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠⁠⁠‍​‌⁠‌‍‌⁠‍‌‌​⁠⁠‍​⁠⁠⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 42 of 154
OPERATION

ec−H2O SYSTEM (OPTION)

In short The optional ec−H2O system turns ordinary water into electrically converted water that helps the machine scrub away dirt. Use clear cool water only in the solution tank, never conventional cleaning detergents, and follow the freeze protection procedure for storage or transport in freezing temperatures.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠​​‌‌‍​‍‌​‌‍‍‌‍⁠⁠​‍‍‌⁠

The ec−H2O (electrically converted water) system operates by producing electrically converted water for cleaning.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠​​‌‌‍​‍‌​‌‍‍‌‍⁠⁠​‍‍‌⁠

Normal water passes through a module where it is oxygenated and charged with an electric current. The electrically converted water changes into a blended acidic and alkaline solution forming a neutral pH cleaner. The converted water attacks the dirt, breaks it into smaller particles, and pulls it off the floor surface allowing the machine to easily scrub away the suspended soil. The converted water then returns to normal water in the recovery tank

The ec−H2O system can be used with all double scrubbing applications.

NOTE: Do not enable the ec−H2O system with conventional cleaning detergents in the solution tank. Drain, raise and refill the solution tank with clear cool water only before operating the ec−H2O system. Conventional cleaning detergents/restorers may cause failure to the ec−H2O solution system.
NOTE: Storage or transporting machines equipped with ec−H2O in freezing temperatures requires special procedures. Follow the freeze protection procedure located in the STORAGE INFORMATION section.
Photo of the ec−H2O module installed in the machine, a dark gray housing with wiring, silver hoses and a small blue pump mounted on the teal machine frame
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 43, used with permission. SES ref PF-UF4N-Y4QJ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠​​‌‌‍​‍‌​‌‍‍‌‍⁠⁠​‍‍‌⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 43 of 154
OPERATION

PRE-OPERATION CHECKLIST

In short This checklist lists the items to check before you operate the machine, covering fluids, filters, brushes, squeegees, hoses, tanks, brakes and steering. It also has extra checks for FaST and ec−H2O scrubbing.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠​‌‍​⁠​‍​​‌⁠‌‌‌‌​‌‌‍​‍

Check over this list of items before operating the machine:‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠​‌‍​⁠​‍​​‌⁠‌‌‌‌​‌‌‍​‍

  • Check the hydraulic fluid level. (if applicable)
  • Check the battery fluid and charge level.
  • Check the tank cover seals for damage and wear.
  • Clean the vacuum fan inlet filter.
  • Check the condition of the scrubbing brushes. Remove any string, banding, plastic wrap, or other debris wrapped around them.
  • Check the squeegees for damage, wear and for deflection adjustment.
  • Check the vacuum hose for debris or blockage.
  • ES machines; check the detergent tank level.
  • Drain and clean the recovery tank.
  • ES machines; drain and clean the solution tank and ES filter. Rinse level sensors.
  • Check the brakes and steering for proper operation.
  • Empty and clean the debris tray. (if applicable).
  • Check the service records to determine maintenance requirements.
  • FAST Scrubbing: Check the FaST PAK concentrate agent level, replace carton as needed. See the INSTALLING THE FaST PAK AGENT section of the manual.
  • For FaST or ec−H2O Scrubbing: Check that all conventional cleaning agents/restorers are drained and rinsed from the solution tank.
  • For FaST or ec−H2O Scrubbing: Check that the solution tank is filled with clear cool water only.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 44, used with permission. SES ref PF-O6AG-VQYU‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠​‌‍​⁠​‍​​‌⁠‌‌‌‌​‌‌‍​‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 44 of 154
OPERATION

INSTALLING FaST PAK AGENT

In short This section explains how to install the FaST PAK cleaning concentrate on a machine equipped with FaST. Turn the machine off, prepare the carton and bag connector, empty the solution tank, and open the side cover door to reach the carton.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‍‌‌​⁠⁠​‌⁠⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‌​‍⁠‍‌‌‍
NOTE: Machine must be equipped with FaST before the FaST PAK agent can be installed.
  1. Turn the machine power off.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine, stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine, and remove key.
  2. Remove the perforated knock−outs from the FaST PAK Floor Cleaning Concentrate carton. Do not remove the bag from the carton. Pull out the bag’s hose connector on the bottom of the bag and remove the hose cap from the connector.
    A hand holding a FaST PAK carton and inserting the bag's hose connector at the bottom of the carton into the machine's connection; a white arrow points to the connector
    NOTE: The FaST PAK Floor Cleaning Concentrate is specifically designed for use with the FaST system scrubbing application. NEVER use a substitute, machine damage will result.
    FOR SAFETY: When using machine, always follow the handling instructions on chemical container.
  3. Empty the solution tank. See the DRAINING AND CLEANING THE TANKS section of the manual.
    Lower side of the machine near the solution tank with a white arrow pointing to the solution tank drain hose area
    NOTE: When scrubbing with the FaST system option, use clean water only. Do not add cleaning agents in the solution tank. Conventional cleaning agents/restorers may cause failure to the FaST solution system..
  4. Open the side cover door to access the FaST PAK carton.
    Side cover door of the machine with a white arrow pointing to the door latch used to open it
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 45, used with permission. SES ref PF-22X5-IDHI‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‍‌‌​⁠⁠​‌⁠⁠‍⁠⁠⁠‌​‍⁠‍‌‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 45 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

  1. Place the FaST PAK carton in the carton holder under the front cover of the machine. Connect the supply hose to the FaST PAK bag.
NOTE: If any dried concentrate is visible on the supply hose connector or the on the FaST PAK connector, soak and clean with warm water.
A hand placing a FaST PAK carton into the carton holder inside the machine, with a large arrow pointing at the carton where the supply hose connects
  1. Make sure to connect the supply hose onto the hose storing plug when the supply hose is not connected to the FaST PAK. This will prevent the FaST solution system from drying out and clogging up the hose.
A hand holding the supply hose connector at the hose storing plug, with two arrows pointing toward each other showing the connector being attached to the plug
  1. The FaST solution system must be primed for first time use only. To prime system, unplug the electrical connector from the solution pump, and operate the machine in the FaST Scrub Mode for seven to ten minutes. Reconnect the solution pump connector.
  2. When replacing an empty FaST PAK carton, allow the new FaST PAK detergent to gravity feed into the system for several minutes prior to operating the FaST system. If the detergent does not flow out of the FaST PAK, simply squeeze and release the hose several times. If the previous FaST PAK was run dry, it may take up to 7−10 minutes of operation to remove any air pockets in the system before you achieve maximum foaming.
A hand at the solution pump, with a large arrow pointing at the pump's electrical connector that is unplugged for priming
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 46, used with permission. SES ref PF-WRV2-FFRI‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌‍⁠‌‍⁠‌‌‌‌⁠‌​⁠⁠​​⁠‌‍​‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 46 of 154
OPERATION

STARTING THE MACHINE

In short This section covers the steps for starting the machine. Sit in the operator's seat with the directional pedal in neutral and a foot on the brake or the parking brake set, turn the power on, release the parking brake, and drive to the area to be cleaned.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‌‌‌​‍‍‍‌‍⁠⁠​​⁠​‌‍‌‍​⁠⁠
  1. You must be in the operator’s seat with the directional pedal in neutral, and your foot on the brake pedal or with the parking brake set.
    FOR SAFETY: When starting machine, keep foot on brake and directional pedal in neutral.
  2. Turn the machine power on.
    Control panel with display, buttons, round emergency stop button and key switch; a curved arrow shows the key being turned clockwise to switch the machine power on
  3. Release the machine parking brake.
    Operator's foot area of the machine with an arrow pointing to the parking brake pedal that is pressed to release the parking brake, next to the larger directional pedal
  4. Drive the machine to the area to be cleaned.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 47, used with permission. SES ref PF-NHKJ-AGAV‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​‍⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‌‌‌​‍‍‍‌‍⁠⁠​​⁠​‌‍‌‍​⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 47 of 154
OPERATION

FILLING THE TANKS

In short This section covers the first steps before filling the tanks: power the machine on, drive to the filling site, power it off and set the parking brake. Keep your foot on the brake with the directional pedal in neutral when starting, and follow the safety rules before leaving the machine.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‍​​​‍‌​‍⁠⁠‍​‌⁠​‌‍⁠‍‍​​‍
  1. Turn the machine power on. See the STARTING THE MACHINE section of the manual.
    FOR SAFETY: When starting machine, keep foot on brake and directional pedal in neutral.
  2. Drive the machine to the filling site.
    Operator's foot pedals on the machine floor, with an arrow pointing at the right-hand directional pedal
  3. Turn the machine power off.
    Control panel with display, push buttons and the key switch; a curved arrow shows turning the key to switch the machine power off
  4. Set the machine parking brake.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine and remove key.
    Foot pedals on the machine floor, with an arrow pointing at the small parking brake pedal on the left
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 48, used with permission. SES ref PF-M3O4-5JDN‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‍​​​‍‌​‍⁠⁠‍​‌⁠​‌‍⁠‍‍​​‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 48 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

  1. CONVENTIONAL SCRUBBING: Open the solution tank cover. Measure and pour in the correct amount of detergent. Fill the rest of the solution tank with water up to the FULL line near the top of the tank.

NOTE: Floor conditions, water condition, amount of soilage, types of soilage, and brush action all play an important role in determining the type and concentration of detergent used. For specific recommendations, contact your Tennant representative.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍​⁠⁠⁠⁠​‍⁠​‍‌‌‍​‌⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠​‌

Photo of the top of the solution tank with a large white arrow pointing to the tank cover area where the solution tank is filled
WARNING: Flammable materials can cause an explosion or fire. Do not use flammable materials in tank(s).
FOR SAFETY: When using machine, follow mixing and handling instructions on chemical containers.
  1. FaST or ec−H2O SCRUBBING: Open the solution tank cover and fill the solution tank with clear cool water only.
NOTE: When cleaning using the FaST or ec−H2O option, USE CLEAR COOL WATER ONLY. DO NOT add cleaning agents in solution tank. Conventional cleaning agents/restorers may cause failure to the system.
  1. ES Mode: Remove the detergent tank (option) lid. Fill the tank almost to the top. Be sure to use only the proper detergent for your scrubbing application. Put the lid back on the detergent tank.
Photo looking down at the open detergent tank with its lid removed and a large white arrow pointing into the tank opening
WARNING: Flammable materials can cause an explosion or fire. Do not use flammable materials in tank(s).

NOTE: Floor conditions, water condition, amount of soilage, type of soilage, and brush action all play an important role in determining the type and concentration of detergent used. For specific recommendations, contact your TENNANT representative.

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 49, used with permission. SES ref PF-SE5M-ECLT‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍​⁠⁠⁠⁠​‍⁠​‍‌‌‍​‌⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠​‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 49 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

  1. ES mode with auto fill : Connect the hose from the water source to the auto-fill connection on the machine. Turn the machine power on, and turn on the water source. The auto-fill will automatically fill the tanks to the proper level for ES operation and automatically shut-off.
Photo of the machine's side with a white arrow pointing at the auto-fill water connection near the rear wheel
NOTE: An alarm will sound when the solution tank is full.
NOTE: When using the auto-fill feature on the ES machine, both tanks should be empty to prevent overfilling of the tanks.

ES mode without auto-fill: Fill the solution tank to the FULL line.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠​‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‌‍⁠​⁠⁠‍​​‌​​​​‍‌⁠‍⁠​‍​⁠

Photo of the top of the solution tank with a white arrow pointing at the tank fill opening
WARNING: Flammable materials can cause an explosion or fire. Do not use flammable materials in tank(s).
FOR SAFETY: When using machine, follow mixing and handling instructions on chemical containers.

ES mode without auto-fill: Fill the recovery tank half full of water (to the bottom of the ES filter support bracket).

Photo inside the open recovery tank with a white arrow pointing at the ES filter support bracket and filter
NOTE: If you DO NOT want to use the ES system, DO NOT put water in the recovery tank. Turn the ES switch OFF.
  1. Close the solution tank cover.
Photo of the solution tank cover with a curved arrow showing it being closed
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 50, used with permission. SES ref PF-DUPV-7VF3‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠​‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‌‍⁠​⁠⁠‍​​‌​​​​‍‌⁠‍⁠​‍​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 50 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

SWEEPING, SCRUBBING AND BRUSH INFORMATION

In short This section gives general tips for sweeping and scrubbing: clear large debris first, plan long straight runs, and use only the scrub brush pressure and solution flow you need. It also describes which brush type suits which cleaning job.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠‌‌‍​​⁠‍⁠​‍⁠⁠‍‍‍​‍‌⁠‍

Pick up oversized debris before cleaning. Pick up pieces of wire, string, twine, etc., which could become wrapped around the sweeping or scrubbing brushes.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠‌‌‍​​⁠‍⁠​‍⁠⁠‍‍‍​‍‌⁠‍

Plan the sweeping and scrubbing in advance. Try to arrange long runs with minimum stopping and starting. Sweep debris from very narrow aisles into main aisles ahead of time. Do an entire floor or section at one time.

Drive as straight a path as possible. Avoid bumping into posts or scraping the sides of the machine. Overlap the scrub paths by several centimeters (a few inches).

Avoid turning the steering wheel too sharply when the machine is in motion. The machine is very responsive to the movement of the steering wheel. Avoid sudden turns, except in emergencies.

When scrubbing dead end aisles, start at the closed end of the aisle and scrub your way out.

Adjust the machine speed, scrub brush pressure, and solution flow as required when scrubbing. Use minimum scrub brush pressure and solution flow required for the best results. The machine has an edge clean feature for all MaxPro 1000 scrub heads, for scrubbing against an edge.

If you see poor scrubbing performance, stop scrubbing and refer to MACHINE TROUBLESHOOTING.

For best results, use the correct brush type for your cleaning application. The following are recommended brush applications.

Polypropylene side sweeping brush − A general purpose brush for sweeping of light to medium debris in both indoor and outdoor applications. This brush is recommended in places where bristles may get wet.

Polypropylene sweeping brush − Superior pick up of sand, gravel and paper litter. Polypropylene retains its stiffness when wet, and can be used indoors or out with equal performance. Not recommended for high−temperature debris.

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 51, used with permission. SES ref PF-OMSN-V73F‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠‌‌‍​​⁠‍⁠​‍⁠⁠‍‍‍​‍‌⁠‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 51 of 154
OPERATION

Non-scuff polypropylene scrub brush − This brush uses a softer, general purpose polypropylene bristle to lift lightly compacted soilage without scuffing high-gloss coated floors.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‌​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌​‌⁠‌​​⁠‍‍⁠⁠⁠​​‌​​‍⁠

Nylon scrub brush − Recommended for scrubbing coated floors. Cleans without scuffing.

Super abrasive bristle scrub brush − Nylon fiber impregnated with abrasive grit to remove stains and soilage. Strong action on any surface, performing well on buildup, grease, or tire marks.

Stripping pad − This brown pad is for stripping floors. Quickly and easily cuts through old finish to prepare the floor for re-coating.

Underside view of the scrub head showing a round disk brush with a large gray arrow pointing up to the brush drive hub at the center of the brush
05939

Surface preparation pad − This maroon pad is for very aggressive stripping without chemicals.

Scrubbing pad − This blue pad is for scrubbing floors. Removes dirt, spills and scuffs, leaving a clean surface ready for re-coating.

Buffing pad − This red pad is for buffing floors. Quickly cleans and removes scuff marks while polishing the floor to a high gloss.

Polishing pad − This white pad is for polishing floors. Maintains a high gloss. Use for buffing very soft finishes and lower traffic areas, or use for polishing soft waxes on wood floors.

Cylindrical polypropylene scrub brush − This cylindrical brush uses a softer, general purpose polypropylene bristle to lift lightly compacted soilage without scuffing high-gloss coated floors.

Cylindrical nylon scrub brush − This cylindrical brush is recommended for scrubbing coated floors. Cleans without scuffing.

Cylindrical super abrasive bristle scrub brush − Nylon fiber impregnated with abrasive grit to remove stains and soilage. Strong action on any surface, performing well on buildup, grease, or tire marks.

NOTE: Cylindrical scrub brushes must be installed with the herringbone patterns on the brushes pointing towards each other for best debris pick up.
Two cylindrical brush patterns shown one above the other, each with herringbone chevrons pointing toward each other
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 52, used with permission. SES ref PF-M6TA-2PFV‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‌​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌​‌⁠‌​​⁠‍‍⁠⁠⁠​​‌​​‍⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 52 of 154
OPERATION

SWEEPING

In short Press the sweeping switch to lower and start the brushes and vacuum fan. Use the front flap lever when sweeping large debris, and press the switch again to stop sweeping.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍​‌‍‌⁠‌⁠‌‌​⁠⁠‌‍‍​​‌‌⁠‌‍
  1. Press the sweeping switch to lower and start the main and side sweeping brushes and the sweeping vacuum fan.
Control panel with the TENNANT logo and a display of sweeping icons; a large arrow points to the sweeping switch at the upper right, whose indicator lights are flashing
353573
  1. Pull back on the front flap lever when sweeping large debris.
  2. Release the lever, and the flap will lower over the debris.
  3. The flap will trap large debris back into the hopper.
Photo of the machine's front flap lever beside the control panel, with a large arrow pointing down at the lever handle

STOP SWEEPING

  1. Press the sweeping switch again to raise and stop the sweeping brushes and the vacuum fan. The filter will shake for ten seconds, then stop automatically.
NOTE: If used, the side brush(es) will automatically stop and raise when the sweeping brush switch is pressed.
Control panel with the TENNANT logo and display icons; a large arrow points to the sweeping switch at the upper right, with the indicator lights off
353569
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 53, used with permission. SES ref PF-NXT3-EVWA‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍​‌‍‌⁠‌⁠‌‌​⁠⁠‌‍‍​​‌‌⁠‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 53 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

EMPTYING THE HOPPER

In short This section explains how to empty the hopper into a dumpster. You drive near the dump site, raise the hopper with the hopper raise switch, position it over the dumpster, then tilt it forward with the hopper dump switch.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍​‍⁠‍​​‍‍​​​‍​‍​‌​⁠‌⁠​‌
  1. Slowly drive the machine near the debris dump site.
NOTE: Make sure the machine is far enough away from the dumpster to raise the hopper without interference.
  1. Press and hold the hopper raise switch, until the hopper is at the desired height.
Control panel drawing with the Tennant logo and a display screen; a large arrow points to the lit switch button at the right side that raises the hopper
353569
NOTE: Be aware that the minimum ceiling height needed to high dump the hopper is 1525 mm (60 in).
FOR SAFETY: When using machine, make sure adequate clearance is available before raising hopper.
WARNING: Lift arm pinch point. Stay clear of hopper lift arms.
  1. Slowly drive the machine forward until the hopper is directly over the dumpster.
  2. Press and hold the hopper dump switch, to tilt the hopper forward. Allow all of the debris from the hopper to fall into the dumpster.
Control panel drawing with the Tennant logo; a large arrow points to the lit switch button at the upper left that dumps the hopper, and the right-hand switch is also lit
353574
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 54, used with permission. SES ref PF-3UHR-HORF‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍​‍⁠‍​​‍‍​​​‍​‍​‌​⁠‌⁠​‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 54 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

  1. Press and hold the hopper retract switch to tilt the hopper back in the upright position.
  2. Slowly drive the machine backward until the machine is far enough away from the dumpster to lower the hopper without interference.
NOTE: Make sure the machine is far enough away from the dumpster to lower the hopper without interference.
Control panel with the Tennant logo and a display screen; a large black arrow points to the lower left switch beside the screen, which has a flashing indicator light, used for the hopper retract switch
353574
  1. Press and hold the hopper lower switch, until the hopper has lowered, rotated back to the retract position and sealed tightly against the machine.
WARNING: Lift arm pinch point. Stay clear of hopper lift arms.
Control panel with the Tennant logo and a display screen showing hopper lowering; a large black arrow points to the lower right switch beside the screen, which has a flashing indicator light, used for the hopper lower switch
353569
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 55, used with permission. SES ref PF-BCRW-QPAS‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​​⁠⁠​‍​⁠⁠‌‌​‍‍‌‌‍‌⁠​⁠‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 55 of 154
OPERATION

ENGAGING HOPPER SUPPORT BAR

In short This procedure raises the hopper fully so the support bar can be engaged. Set the parking brake, turn the power on, then hold the hopper raise switch until the hopper is fully raised.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‍​​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‍⁠‌​​‍⁠‍‌‌​⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‍‍‌
  1. Set the machine parking brake.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine, stop on level surface, set parking brake.
    Photo of the foot pedal area with a white arrow pointing to the parking brake pedal that is pressed to set the brake
  2. Turn the machine power on. See the STARTING THE MACHINE section of the manual.
    FOR SAFETY: When starting machine, keep foot on brake and directional pedal in neutral.
    Photo of the control panel with a curved arrow showing the key being turned in the key switch to turn the machine power on
  3. Press and hold the hopper raise switch, until the hopper is in the fully raised position.

NOTE: Be aware that the minimum ceiling height needed to high dump the hopper is 1525 mm (60 in).‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‍​​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‍⁠‌​​‍⁠‍‌‌​⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‍‍‌

FOR SAFETY: When using machine, make sure adequate clearance is available before raising hopper.
WARNING: Lift arm pinch point. Stay clear of hopper lift arms.
Display panel with the Tennant logo and symbols; a black arrow points to the lower right button next to a flashing light symbol, the hopper raise switch
353569
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 56, used with permission. SES ref PF-KZSP-ONGC‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‍​​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‍⁠‌​​‍⁠‍‌‌​⁠‍⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‍‍‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 56 of 154
OPERATION
  1. Lower and position the hopper support bar onto the bar stop.
WARNING: Raised hopper may fall. Engage hopper support bar.
A hand lowers the hopper support bar onto the bar stop on the raised hopper, with a curved arrow showing the downward motion
  1. Press and hold the hopper lower switch until the hopper rests on the hopper support bar.
WARNING: Lift arm pinch point. Stay clear of hopper lift arms.
Control panel display with an arrow pointing to the hopper lower switch at the lower right, which has a flashing indicator
353569
  1. Turn the machine power off. See the STOP THE MACHINE section of the manual.
Machine control panel with a curved arrow showing the key switch being turned to the off position

DISENGAGING HOPPER SUPPORT BAR

In short This section covers releasing the hopper support bar. The first step is to set the machine parking brake, after stopping on a level surface.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‍⁠​⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​​‌​‍​‍‍‍‌
  1. Set the machine parking brake.
FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine, stop on level surface, set parking brake.
Foot pedals at the operator's platform with an arrow pointing to the parking brake pedal
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 57, used with permission. SES ref PF-3TNY-INPC‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‍⁠​⁠​‍‍​​​​‍​​‌​‍​‍‍‍‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 57 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

  1. Turn the machine power on. See the STARTING THE MACHINE section of the manual.
    FOR SAFETY: When starting machine, keep foot on brake and directional pedal in neutral.
    Photo of the control panel with the key switch; a curved arrow shows the key being turned to switch the machine power on
  2. Press and hold the hopper raise switch, to slightly raise the hopper.
    FOR SAFETY: When using machine, make sure adequate clearance is available before raising hopper.
    WARNING: Lift arm pinch point. Stay clear of hopper lift arms.
    Display panel with a large arrow pointing at the lower right push-button, which has a flashing indicator, the hopper raise switch
    353569
  3. Put the hopper support bar in its storage position.
    WARNING: Lift arm pinch point. Stay clear of hopper lift arms.
    Photo of a hand moving the hopper support bar, with a curved arrow showing it swinging up into its storage position
  4. Press and hold the hopper lower switch, until the hopper has lowered and sealed tightly against the machine.
    WARNING: Lift arm pinch point. Stay clear of hopper lift arms.
    Display panel with a large arrow pointing at the lower right push-button, which has a flashing indicator, the hopper lower switch
    353569
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 58, used with permission. SES ref PF-47BG-LSZS‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‌‍​‌‍⁠​‍‍​‌‍⁠​⁠‍‌‍‍‌‌⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 58 of 154
OPERATION

SCRUBBING

In short This section explains how to start scrubbing: start the machine, drive to the area to be cleaned, then set the FaST or ec-H2O switch to the desired solution flow. On ec-H2O models, a blinking red light with an alarm means the module must be flushed.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‍‌‌​‌⁠‌⁠‍‌‍‌‍‌​‍⁠​‍‌​‌​‌
  1. Start the machine. See the STARTING THE MACHINE section of the manual.
    FOR SAFETY: When starting machine, keep foot on brake and directional pedal in neutral.
  2. Drive the machine to the area to be cleaned.
    Photo of the operator's foot pedal area with a white arrow pointing to the directional pedal on the right, next to a non-skid footrest
  3. FaST SCRUBBING: Press the FaST switch to the desired solution flow. See the FaST SWITCH section of the manual.
    Photo of the FaST switch panel with a white arrow pointing to the rocker switch, and warning labels for flammable materials at the right
NOTE: Leave the FaST switch in the CONVENTIONAL SCRUBBING position if not using the FaST system.

ec−H2O Scrubbing: Press the ec−H2O switch to the desired solution flow. See the ec−H2O SWITCH section of the manual.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‍‌‌​‌⁠‌⁠‍‌‍‌‍‌​‍⁠​‍‌​‌​‌

NOTE: The ec−H2O system indicator light will not turn on until the machine starts scrubbing.

ec−H2O Model: If an alarm sounds and the ec−H2O system indicator light begins to blink red, the ec−H2O module must be flushed to resume ec−H2O operation (See ec−H2O MODULE FLUSH PROCEDURE).

Photo of the ec-H2O rocker switch panel with a white arrow pointing to the switch, with safety and warning labels to its right
NOTE: When the alarm sounds and the light blinks red, the machine will bypass the ec−H2O system. To continue scrubbing, press the ec−H2O switch to conventional scrubbing.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 59, used with permission. SES ref PF-RH2M-7IXC‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‍‌‌​‌⁠‌⁠‍‌‍‌‍‌​‍⁠​‍‌​‌​‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 59 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

ATTENTION: (ec−H2O model) Do not allow solution tank to run dry. ec−H2O module failure may result if operated without water for an extended period.
ec−H2O SYSTEM INDICATOR LIGHT CODECONDITION
Solid greenNormal operation
Blinking redFlush ec−H2O module
Solid redContact Service Center
  1. CONVENTIONAL SCRUBBING: Adjust the solution flow to the floor as needed.
NOTE: When using the FaST system, the solution flow lever is nonfunctional. The FaST system flow rate is pre−set.
Photo of the steering wheel and control panel area with a large upward arrow beside the black-knobbed solution flow lever, showing the lever being raised to increase solution flow

Increase flow: Raise the lever up. Use this flow rate for rough floors and heavy or compacted dirt.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌‍‍​‌‌‌⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠​⁠‍​‌‌‌​​​

Decrease flow: Lower the lever down. Use this flow rate for smooth floors and light dirt.

Stop flow: Lower the lever all the way down.

NOTE: For machines equipped with cylindrical scrub heads, decrease solution flow rate when turning.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 60, used with permission. SES ref PF-ZVQT-35BW‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌‍‍​‌‌‌⁠​⁠‍⁠⁠​⁠‍​‌‌‌​​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 60 of 154
OPERATION
  1. Press the scrub switch to start the scrubbing operations. See the SCRUB SWITCH section of the manual.
WARNING: Flammable materials or reactive metals can cause explosion or fire. Do not pick up.

As long as the machine is moving forward the scrub head will lower and the scrub brushes will start. The optional sweeping side brush(es) will lower and start. The rear squeegee will lower and the vacuum fan will start. The solution system will start when the machine first begins to move forward, but only if the solution flow lever is on. The detergent pump will start and the optional FaST, ec−H20, or ES systems if the switches are on.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‌⁠⁠​‌⁠⁠‌‌‍⁠⁠⁠​⁠⁠​‌⁠⁠⁠​​

Control panel display with a large arrow pointing at the scrub switch at the upper left, which has a flashing light beside it; the screen shows brush, battery, recovery tank and ES system icons
353562
NOTE: The scrub head will raise when the directional pedal is in the neutral position. The rear squeegee will raise when the directional pedal is in the reverse position.
NOTE: If an excess of water in the recovery tank triggers an overflow switch, an overflow alarm will sound for ten seconds and an overflow icon will appear on the control panel. All scrubbing functions will be canceled. To make the overflow icon disappear, drain the recovery tank, then press the scrub switch.
NOTE: A low battery and a no brush current sensed will also cancel the scrub system.
  1. Adjust brush pressure for cleaning application. See the SCRUB SWITCH section of the manual.
Control panel display with a large arrow pointing at the scrub switch at the upper left, which has a flashing light beside it; the screen shows brush, battery, recovery tank and ES system icons
353562
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 61, used with permission. SES ref PF-U4CE-4US5‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‌⁠⁠​‌⁠⁠‌‌‍⁠⁠⁠​⁠⁠​‌⁠⁠⁠​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 61 of 154
OPERATION
  1. Press the edge scrub switch if edge scrubbing is necessary.
Tennant control panel with a large arrow pointing at the edge scrub switch on the left side, next to a flashing indicator; the display shows battery, solution tank and ES symbols
353564
  1. Adjust the detergent flow with the detergent flow switch (option).
Tennant control panel with a large arrow pointing at the detergent flow switch on the right side, which has a flashing indicator
353551
  1. Press the ES switch (option) if extended scrubbing is necessary.
NOTE: The recovery tank must be half full to use the ES option.
NOTE: A full solution tank will turn off the ES pump
Tennant control panel with a large arrow pointing at the ES switch at the lower right, which has a flashing indicator
353562
NOTE: If you do not want to use the ES system, make sure the indicator next to the ES switch is off.
  1. Drive the machine forward and scrub as required.
WARNING: Flammable materials or reactive metals can cause explosion or fire. Do not pick up.
Tennant control panel with a large arrow pointing at the indicator next to the ES switch at the lower right, which is off (solid dot)
353562
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 62, used with permission. SES ref PF-NOM4-5CJX‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌​⁠​‌‌​​‍‌‍‍⁠‍‍⁠‍⁠‌⁠‌‌​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 62 of 154
OPERATION

DOUBLE SCRUBBING

In short Double scrubbing means making two or more passes over a heavily soiled area. The first pass is made with the rear and side squeegees raised so the solution can soak in, and the second pass is made with the squeegees down.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​‍⁠‌‌‍‌‍​​​‍‍‍‍‌⁠‍⁠‌​​

Double scrubbing is the process of making two or more passes over a heavily soiled area. The first pass is made with the rear and side squeegees raised to allow the solution to soak into the floor. Raise the side squeegees and secure in place with the side squeegee double scrub latches.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​‍⁠‌‌‍‌‍​​​‍‍‍‍‌⁠‍⁠‌​​

Double scrubbing can be performed using the FaST SCRUBBING SYSTEM (option), ec−H2O SCRUBBING SYSTEM (option) or CONVENTIONAL SCRUBBING methods.

Use the maximum solution and detergent flow settings. Use a higher brush pressure setting. Let the solution remain on the floor for 5 to 15 minutes, then make a second scrubbing pass with the rear and side squeegees down.

Underside rear of the machine showing two squeegee lift mechanisms, with two white arrows pointing down at the side squeegee double scrub latches
NOTE: When using the FaST or ec−H2O system (option), the solution flow lever is nonfunctional. The FaST and ec−H2O system flow rates are pre−set. The ec−H2O module has optional flow rate settings. If solution flow adjustments are required, contact an Authorized Service Center.

FOR SAFETY: When using machine, go slow on inclines and slippery surfaces.

STOP SCRUBBING

In short Press the scrub switch to stop scrubbing, then keep driving forward until the vacuum fan shuts off.
  1. Press the scrub switch to stop the scrubbing operations.

The scrub brushes will stop and the scrub head will raise. The ES detergent pump (option) will stop, and the solution flow will stop, the FaST system will stop. After a short delay, the rear squeegee will automatically raise and the scrubbing vacuum fan will stop.

Machine display panel with a large arrow pointing at the scrub switch at the upper left, the screen showing the time 12:16 PM and the number 0020, with buttons on each side
353550
  1. Continue driving the machine forward until the vacuum fan shuts off.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 63, used with permission. SES ref PF-BMOG-LICA‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​​⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​‍⁠‌‌‍‌‍​​​‍‍‍‍‌⁠‍⁠‌​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 63 of 154
OPERATION

DRAINING AND CLEANING THE TANKS

In short The recovery tank is drained and cleaned when you finish scrubbing or when the recovery tank full indicator comes on. If the machine was used in ES mode, the solution tank is also drained and cleaned. The first steps are to stop scrubbing, drive to a disposal site, turn the power off and set the parking brake.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​​​​​​‌​⁠​​​​‍‌‍​⁠‍‍‍⁠⁠​‍‍‌‍⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠⁠

When you are finished scrubbing, or when the recovery tank full indicator comes on, the recovery tank should be drained and cleaned. The solution tank can then be filled again for additional scrubbing.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​​​​​​‌​⁠​​​​‍‌‍​⁠‍‍‍⁠⁠​‍‍‌‍⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠⁠

If you used the machine in ES mode, the solution tank should also be drained and cleaned when you are finished scrubbing.

  1. Stop scrubbing. See the STOP SCRUBBING section of the manual.
  2. Drive the machine next to an appropriate disposal site.
  3. Turn the machine power off.
FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine and remove key.
Photo of the control panel with a curved white arrow around the key switch showing the key being turned to switch the machine power off
  1. Set the machine parking brake.
Photo of the floor pedals with a white arrow pointing to the parking brake pedal that is pressed to set the parking brake
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 64, used with permission. SES ref PF-BUZD-THQD‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​​​​​​‌​⁠​​​​‍‌‍​⁠‍‍‍⁠⁠​‍‍‌‍⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 64 of 154
OPERATION
  1. Unscrew the drain hose cap from the recovery tank drain access cap.
  2. Pull out and place the drain hose next to the floor drain. Remove the drain end cap from the hose. Stand back because the solution rushes out of the drain hose.
    ES mode: Unscrew the drain hose cap from the solution tank drain access cap and drain the solution tank.
A gloved hand holds the drain hose end with its cap unscrewed, pulling the hose out of the drain access opening on the side of the machine
05914

For machines with the positive solution control drain option, remove the drain cap and connect the hose. Place the hose end next to the floor drain and open the drain valve by pulling the lever.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍​‌‌⁠‌​​⁠‍‍​‌‍⁠​​​‌‌‍⁠‌

Close view of the positive solution control drain option showing the drain fitting with its chained cap and the drain valve lever, with a hose lying beside it
  1. Open the recovery tank cover.
  2. Spray the inside of the recovery tank with clean water. DO NOT allow any water to enter the vacuum fan air intake opening towards the front of the tank.
NOTE: DO NOT use steam to clean the tanks. Excessive heat can damage the tanks and components.
Opened recovery tank cover showing the inside of the tank and the filter panel at the front, with a white arrow pointing toward the vacuum fan air intake area that must be kept dry
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 65, used with permission. SES ref PF-OABJ-A6Q6‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍​‌‌⁠‌​​⁠‍‍​‌‍⁠​​​‌‌‍⁠‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 65 of 154
OPERATION
  1. Remove the large drain cap and flush out the bottom on the recovery tank.
Photo of the machine's rear lower area with a large white arrow pointing to the large drain cap on the recovery tank, and a drain hose fitting visible on the floor below
  1. ES mode: Locate the ES cleanout wand under the battery cover. Remove it and attach it to a water supply hose to use for cleaning.
  2. ES mode: Lift up the ES filter by the handle until the mesh is exposed and rinse it thoroughly.
Photo looking into the tank area showing the ES filter with its black handle and round mesh, and a white arrow pointing to the handle
  1. Rinse off the float sensor(s) on the inside of the recovery tank.
Photo looking down into the open recovery tank with a white arrow pointing down at the float sensor on the inside of the tank
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 66, used with permission. SES ref PF-IZKM-4MZ3‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​​‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍⁠‍‌⁠‍⁠‍​‌‍‌⁠​⁠‌‍⁠‍⁠⁠‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 66 of 154
OPERATION
  1. ES mode: Drain the solution tank. Flush out the solution tank with clean water. Rinse the solution outlet filters at the bottom of the tank through the drain access.
Photo of the lower side of the machine with a white arrow pointing to the solution tank drain access, with the drain hose end visible at the lower right
  1. ES mode: Rinse the sensor floats near the top of the solution tank.
NOTE: DO NOT use steam to clean the tanks. Excessive heat can damage the tanks and components.
Photo looking into the solution tank with a white arrow pointing to the sensor floats near the top of the tank
  1. Cylindrical scrub head: Press down on the right side squeegee support guard latch until the right side squeegee support guard opens. Swing the squeegee support guard away from the scrub head.
Photo of a gloved hand pressing down on the right side squeegee support guard latch, with a white arrow pointing down at the latch
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 67, used with permission. SES ref PF-QCRJ-SFWX‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​‍‍​‍⁠‌‌​​​‍⁠​​⁠‌​‌‍​‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 67 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

  1. Cylindrical scrub head: Remove and clean the debris trough from the right hand side of the machine. Place the trough back in the scrub head when clean.
NOTE: The debris trough can be removed from the right hand side of the machine only.
Dark debris trough in the scrub head area on the right hand side of the machine, with a white arrow pointing to the lower right showing the direction to pull it out
  1. Remove the vacuum fan filter from the recovery tank cover.
Open recovery tank cover with the pleated vacuum fan filter removed and held out below the cover
  1. Clean the vacuum fan filter by using low pressure air, or rinsing pleats with low pressure water.
  1. Insert the filter back into the recovery tank cover. Close the tank covers.
Vacuum fan filter inserted back into the open recovery tank cover above the recovery tank
  1. Place the drain end caps on the tank drain hoses. Push the drain hoses back into the tanks.
  2. For machines with the positive solution control drain option, close the drain valve, remove the hose, and connect the drain cap.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 68, used with permission. SES ref PF-5PGE-GNJU‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‌​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠​‍⁠‍‌‍⁠‌​‍‍‍‍​‍‍‍‍‌‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 68 of 154
OPERATION

STOP THE MACHINE

In short This section explains how to bring the machine to a stop: stop scrubbing, use the brake pedal, turn the power off and set the parking brake. The machine may coast, so use the brake pedal to stop it.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍​⁠‌‌‌​​‍⁠​​‌‍‌‍⁠‌⁠‍​⁠​​
  1. Stop scrubbing. See the STOP SCRUBBING section of the manual.
  2. Take your foot off the directional pedal. Step on the brake pedal.
NOTE: The machine may coast for a short distance when your foot is removed from the directional pedal. Use the brake pedal to stop the machine.
Floor pedals of the machine with a white arrow pointing to the brake pedal, next to the larger directional pedal
  1. Turn the machine power off.
Control panel with display, buttons and an emergency stop button; a curved arrow shows the key being turned in the key switch to switch the power off
  1. Set the machine parking brake.
FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine and remove key.
Floor pedals with a white arrow pointing to the parking brake pedal beside the directional pedal
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 69, used with permission. SES ref PF-XEXV-AR7I‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍​⁠‌‌‌​​‍⁠​​‌‍‌‍⁠‌⁠‍​⁠​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 69 of 154
OPERATION

POST-OPERATION CHECKLIST

In short This checklist covers the items to check after you finish scrubbing with the machine powered on. It includes fluid levels, brushes, squeegees, hoses, tanks, filters, brakes and steering, and service records.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​‍‍‌​‍‌‍⁠‌​‍​‌⁠⁠⁠

Check over this list of items after you have finished scrubbing with the machine powered on:‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​‍‍‌​‍‌‍⁠‌​‍​‌⁠⁠⁠

  • Check the hydraulic fluid level. (if applicable)
  • Check for wire, string, or twine wrapped around the brushes.
  • Check the battery fluid and charge level.
  • Check the tank cover seals for damage and wear.
  • Clean the vacuum fan inlet filter.
  • Check the condition of the scrubbing brushes. Remove any string, banding, plastic wrap, or other debris wrapped around them.
  • Check the squeegees for damage, wear and for deflection adjustment.
  • Check the vacuum hose for debris or blockage.
  • ES machines; check the detergent tank level.
  • Drain and clean the recovery tank.
  • ES machines; drain and clean the solution tank and ES filter. Rinse level sensors.
  • Check the brakes and steering for proper operation.
  • Empty and clean the debris tray. (if applicable).
  • Check the service records to determine maintenance requirements.
  • FaST Scrubbing: If FaST PAK is empty after scrubbing, install a new FaST PAK or connect supply hose to the storage plug.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 70, used with permission. SES ref PF-RJZC-LORF‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​‍‍‌​‍‌‍⁠‌​‍​‌⁠⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 70 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION ON INCLINES

In short Drive slowly on inclines and slippery surfaces. The page gives the maximum rated climb and descent angles for full and empty tanks.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠‍​‍⁠‍​‍​⁠‍‍‍‌‍‌⁠​​‌⁠‍

Drive the machine slowly on inclines.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠‍​‍⁠‍​‍​⁠‍‍‍‌‍‌⁠​​‌⁠‍

FOR SAFETY: When using machine, go slow on inclines and slippery surfaces.

The maximum rated climb and descent angle with full tanks is 6° and with empty tanks is 8°.

OPTIONS

VACUUM WAND

In short The vacuum wand and hose pick up spills that are out of reach of the machine, using the machine's vacuum system. Before using it, turn the machine power off and set the parking brake.

The vacuum wand uses the machine’s vacuum system. The vacuum wand and hose allows pick-up of spills that are out of reach of the machine.

WARNING: Flammable materials or reactive metals can cause explosion or fire. Do not pick up.
  1. Turn the machine power off. See the STOP THE MACHINE section of the manual.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, turn off machine.
    Operator control panel with display, push-buttons, a red emergency stop button and the key switch; a curved arrow shows the key being turned to switch the machine off
  2. Set the parking brake.
    Foot pedals on the machine floor with a white arrow pointing to the parking brake pedal
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 71, used with permission. SES ref PF-CBSX-OL2A‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠‍​‍⁠‍​‍​⁠‍‍‍‌‍‌⁠​​‌⁠‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 71 of 154
OPERATION
  1. Remove the vacuum wand equipment from the tank cover, and the back of the machine.
  2. Remove the squeegee suction hose from the top of the rear squeegee.
A hand pulling the squeegee suction hose upward off the top of the rear squeegee, with a white arrow pointing up
  1. Connect the vacuum wand hose and the squeegee suction hose with the adapter.
  2. Put together the wand and the wand hose.
Two hands pushing the vacuum wand hose and the squeegee suction hose together at the adapter, with two black arrows pointing toward each other
10945
  1. Turn the machine power on. See the STARTING THE MACHINE section of the manual.
Machine control panel with a key in the key switch being turned, shown by a curved arrow, to turn the machine power on
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 72, used with permission. SES ref PF-MUNI-OA3V‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‍​​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‍⁠​⁠​‍‍‍‌​‌​​​​​‌⁠‌‍‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 72 of 154
OPERATION
  1. Press the rear squeegee switch to turn on the vacuum.
NOTE: The rear squeegee will also lower.
Machine display panel showing 12:16 PM and 0020, with a large arrow pointing to the lower left button beside the squeegee icon and a flashing indicator light, the rear squeegee switch to press to turn on the vacuum
353565
  1. Vacuum the floor.
Operator wearing safety glasses holding a vacuum wand with a wide floor head, vacuuming the floor
06599
  1. When finished, shut off the vacuum with the rear squeegee switch.
Machine display panel showing 12:16 PM and 0020, with a large arrow pointing to the lower left button beside the squeegee icon, the rear squeegee switch used to shut off the vacuum
353550
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 73, used with permission. SES ref PF-OR5Y-6KS4‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‍‍⁠​‌‌‍⁠‌‍​‌⁠‍‍‌‍‍⁠​‌‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 73 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

  1. When finished, shut off the vacuum, and raise the rear squeege with the rear squeegee switch.
Machine display panel showing the time 12:16 PM and the number 0020, with a large arrow pointing at the lower left button beside the screen, the button used for the rear squeegee switch
353550
  1. Turn the machine power off. See the STOP THE MACHINE section of the manual.
Machine control panel with a curved arrow around the key switch showing the key being turned to switch the machine power off
  1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the squeegee suction hose.
Two hands pulling apart the vacuum hose and the squeegee suction hose, with a double-headed arrow showing the separating direction
10946
  1. Reconnect the squeegee suction hose to the top of the squeegee.
  2. Clean and rinse the vacuum wand equipment.
  3. Secure the vacuum wand equipment on top of the tank cover.
A hand pushing the squeegee suction hose onto the top of the squeegee, with a downward arrow showing the direction
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 74, used with permission. SES ref PF-QEMF-4LL5‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠‍⁠​⁠‍‍⁠‌‍‌⁠‍​‌‌⁠‌​‍​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 74 of 154
OPERATION

POWER WAND

In short The power wand lets you scrub floors that are out of reach of the machine, using the machine's vacuum and solution systems. To start, turn the machine off, set the parking brake, take the power wand equipment off the tank cover and remove the squeegee suction hose from the rear squeegee.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍⁠‌‍⁠​⁠‌‍‍⁠‍‍‌⁠‍‌‌‌‍‍​​

The power wand uses the machine’s vacuum and solution systems. The power wand allows scrubbing of floors that are out of reach of the machine.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍⁠‌‍⁠​⁠‌‍‍⁠‍‍‌⁠‍‌‌‌‍‍​​

WARNING: Flammable materials or reactive metals can cause explosion or fire. Do not pick up.
  1. Turn the machine power off. See the STOP THE MACHINE section of the manual.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, turn off machine.
    Machine control panel with a curved arrow showing the key switch being turned to the off position
  2. Set the machine parking brake.
    Foot pedals on the machine floor with a white arrow pointing to the parking brake pedal
  3. Remove the power wand equipment from the tank cover.
  4. Remove the squeegee suction hose from the top of the rear squeegee.
    A hand pulling the squeegee suction hose upward off the top of the rear squeegee, with an arrow showing the direction
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 75, used with permission. SES ref PF-HYGC-MZ6I‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍⁠‌‍⁠​⁠‌‍‍⁠‍‍‌⁠‍‌‌‌‍‍​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 75 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

  1. Connect the vacuum wand hose and the squeegee suction hose with the adapter.
Two hands pushing two hose ends together to join them at the adapter, with two black arrows pointing toward each other showing the direction of connection
10945
  1. Attach the end of solution hose to the quick-disconnect. Push the connector in until it stops. Pull on the hose to make sure it is connected.
  1. Attach the other ends of the solution and vacuum hoses to the power wand.
Hands attaching the solution and vacuum hoses to the power wand, with two black arrows showing the direction the hose connectors are pushed on
07320
  1. Turn the machine power on. See the STARTING THE MACHINE section of the manual.
Photo of the machine control panel with a curved arrow showing the key being turned in the key switch to turn the machine power on
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 76, used with permission. SES ref PF-7UYD-JGUJ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌⁠‍‌⁠‌‍‌​​‍‌‍⁠​‍⁠​‌‌‍‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 76 of 154
OPERATION
  1. Press the rear squeegee switch to turn on the vacuum.
NOTE: The rear squeegee will also lower.
Control panel display screen with a large arrow pointing to the rear squeegee switch button at the lower left, where an indicator light is flashing; the display shows 0020
353565
  1. Press the top of the power wand switch to turn the power wand on.
Machine control panel with a large white arrow pointing to the power wand switch, the right one of two black rocker switches below the display, beside the key switch and red emergency stop button
  1. Squeeze the solution lever on the power wand to spray solution on the floor. Scrub the floor with the brush side of the cleaning tool.
Power wand with cleaning tool at its end, showing the brush side and the squeegee side of the tool
06601
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 77, used with permission. SES ref PF-THVU-URXF‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍⁠‍⁠⁠​⁠​⁠‍‌‌‍⁠‍⁠‍⁠‍⁠‍‍⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 77 of 154
OPERATION
  1. Vacuum up the solution by turning over the cleaning tool so the squeegee side is down.
Cleaning tool with a long handle and a bristle brush head, shown tilted so the squeegee side can be turned down to vacuum up the solution
06202

If the cleaning tool is hard to push or is not picking up the solution very well, adjust the roller wheels on the tool by turning the black adjustment knob.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍​⁠⁠‍​‌‍‍⁠​⁠‍​‌​‌‌​‍‍⁠⁠‍

NOTE: The wheels are properly adjusted when the squeegee blades deflect slightly while the tool is pushed back and forth.
A hand gripping the cleaning tool by the black adjustment knob at the roller wheel to adjust the wheels, with the brush side of the tool facing up
06604
  1. When finished, press the bottom of the power wand switch to turn off the power wand.
Machine control panel with a large white arrow pointing to the bottom of the power wand switch, the right of two black rocker switches below the key switch and red emergency stop button
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 78, used with permission. SES ref PF-I7JG-NY6T‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍​⁠⁠‍​‌‍‍⁠​⁠‍​‌​‌‌​‍‍⁠⁠‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 78 of 154
OPERATION
  1. Press the rear squeegee switch to shut off the vacuum.
Control panel display with the Tennant logo, showing the time 12:16 PM, a battery gauge and the number 0020; a large arrow points at the lower left button beside the screen, the rear squeegee switch
353550
  1. Turn the machine power off. See the STOP THE MACHINE section of the manual.
Machine control panel with display buttons, an emergency stop button and push buttons; a curved arrow shows the key being turned to switch the machine power off
  1. Disconnect the solution hose from the machine.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 79, used with permission. SES ref PF-P4XV-TP6T‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌​⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌‌⁠‍‌‍⁠​​‌​‍⁠​​‍​‌‍‌⁠‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 79 of 154
OPERATION

OPERATION

  1. Remove the vacuum hose from the squeegee suction hose.
Two hands pulling apart the vacuum hose and the squeegee suction hose, with two black arrows showing the hoses moving away from each other
10946
  1. Reconnect the squeegee suction hose to the squeegee.
A hand pushing the squeegee suction hose down onto the squeegee inlet, with a white arrow pointing downward
  1. Disconnect the other ends of the solution and vacuum hoses from the power wand.
  2. Secure the power wand equipment on top of the tank cover.
Hands pulling apart the solution and vacuum hose connections at the power wand, with two black arrows showing the pull direction
07321
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 80, used with permission. SES ref PF-E2MC-R2DT‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌​​​​​‌​⁠​​‌​​‌⁠⁠‌‍‍⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠‌⁠​‍⁠​​​‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 80 of 154
OPERATION

MACHINE TROUBLESHOOTING

In short This table lists common problems with water pickup, the vacuum fan, solution flow, scrubbing performance and brush pressure. For each problem it gives the likely causes and the remedy to apply.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‌​‌‍​⁠‌​​⁠‌‍​‍‌​​‍‍‌‌‍
ProblemCauseRemedy
Trailing water − poor or no water pickup.Rear squeegee blades wornRotate or replace blades
Rear squeegee out of adjustmentAdjust rear squeegee
Rear squeegee raisedLower rear squeegee
Side squeegees raisedLower side squeegees
Side squeegee blades wornReplace side squeegee blades
Side squeegees out of adjustmentAdjust side squeegees
Too much solution flow to floorReduce solution flow to floor
Vacuum hose cloggedFlush vacuum hoses
Recovery tank cover not seatedReseat tank cover
Recovery tank cover seal wornReplace seal
Recovery tank full.Drain recovery tank
Float stuck shutting off vacuumClean float
Debris caught on rear squeegeeRemove debris
Foam filling recovery tankEmpty recovery tank; use less or change detergent
Vacuum hose to rear squeegee disconnected or damagedReconnect or replace vacuum hose
Vacuum fan will not turn onRecovery tank fullDrain recovery tank
Vacuum fan circuit breaker trippedReset circuit breaker
Machine in reverse or neutralPropel forward
Vacuum fan failureContact Tennant service representative
Little or no solution flow to the floor.Solution tank emptyFill solution tank
Solution flow lever offOpen solution flow lever
Solution supply lines pluggedFlush solution supply lines
ES switch offTurn ES switch on
Manual control valve closedOpen valve more
Poor scrubbing performance.Debris caught on scrub brushesRemove debris
Improper detergent or brushes usedCheck with TENNANT representative for advice
Scrub brush pressure not set properlyReplace scrub brushes
Worn scrub brushesReplace scrub brushes
Brush pressure light blinks and changes to a lower pressure setting.Brush pressure set to heavy for the applicationDecrease brush pressure setting
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 81, used with permission. SES ref PF-BMRL-G63Y‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‌​‌‍​⁠‌​​⁠‌‍​‍‌​​‍‍‌‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 81 of 154
OPERATION
ProblemCauseRemedy
ES system does not fill solution tank.Clogged solution pump or linesFlush ES system
ES float switch(es) stuckClean switch floats of debris
Clogged ES pump filterClean ES filter
Water levels too low in tanksAdd water to tanks
Excessive dusting.Brush skirts and dust seals worn, damaged, out of adjustment.Replace or adjust brush skirts or dust seals.
Hopper dust filter clogged.Shake and/or clean or replace dust filter.
Sweeping vacuum will not activate.Make sure hopper is in the lowered position
Reset Thermo Sentry
Contact Tennant service representative.
Thermo Sentry tripped.Reset Thermo Sentry
Poor sweeping performance.Brush bristles worn.Replace brushes.
Sweeping brushes not properly adjusted.Adjust brushes.
Debris caught in brush drive mechanism.Remove debris.
Brush drive failure.Contact Tennant service representative.
Hopper full.Empty hopper.
Hopper lip skirts worn or damaged.Replace lip skirts.
FaST System does not operateFaST switch is set for Conventional scrubbingSet the FaST switch for FaST system scrubbing
FaST circuit breaker trippedDetermine cause and reset the 10A circuit breaker button
Clogged FaST PAK supply hose and/or connectorSoak connector and hose in warm water and clean
FaST PAK carton is empty or not connectedReplace FaST PAK carton and/or connect supply hose
FaST system is not primedTo prime, operate the FaST solution system for 7 to 10 minutes.
Clogged flow control orifice/screenRemove and clean orifice/screen
Faulty pump or air compressorContact TENNANT representative
Clogged filter screenDrain solution tank, remove and clean filter screen
Faulty detergent timer moduleContact Tennant representative
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 82, used with permission. SES ref PF-FGFL-VMBX‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌​‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠‍‍​⁠‍⁠‍​⁠‌​‍⁠‌‌​⁠​‌‌‌⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 82 of 154
OPERATION
ProblemCauseRemedy
ec−H2O Model:
ec−H2O system indicator light blinking red
ec−H2O Model:
Alarm sounds
Mineral deposit build−up in moduleFlush module (See ec−H2O MODULE FLUSH PROCEDURE)
ec−H2O Model:
ec−H2O system indicator light solid red
Defective moduleContact Service Center
ec−H2O Model:
ec−H2O system indicator light does not turn on
Defective light or moduleContact Service Center
ec−H2O Model:
No water flow
Clogged moduleContact Service Center
Defective solution pumpReplace solution pump
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 83, used with permission. SES ref PF-BWJY-ZF4B‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‍⁠‍​⁠⁠​​‌⁠‍‌‌​‍‍‍⁠‌‍‍​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 83 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

In short This page shows a top view of the machine with numbered maintenance points and begins the maintenance chart. The chart lists the daily checks, with the key number, what to check, the procedure and the number of service points.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‌​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍‌⁠​​​‍‍‌⁠​‌​‌​‌​‌‍‌​⁠​
Top view drawing of the machine with numbered arrows pointing to the maintenance points: 1, 21, 3, 24, 2, 5, 7, 22, 11, 10, 26, 23, 19, 12, 18, 14 along the top, 16, 2, 15 on the right side, 9 on the left, and 21, 4, 6, 1, 7, 8, 11, 17, 13, 21, 20, 25 along the bottom

MAINTENANCE CHART

NOTE: Check procedures indicated (■) after the first 50-hours of operation.
IntervalKeyDescriptionProcedureLubricant/ FluidNo. of Service Points
Daily1Rear and side squeegeesCheck for damage, wear and adjustment−3
−1
2BrushesCheck for damage and wear−5, (6)
3Recovery tankClean−1
3Recovery tank, ES modeClean ES filter−1
4Solution tank, ES modeClean and flush−1
5Vacuum fan filterClean and flush−1
6Debris trough (Cylindrical brushes only)Check and clean−1
14Debris hopperClean−1
15Dust filterCheck and clean−1
−MachineCheck for leaks−1
26FaST PAK supply hose and connectorClean and connect hose to storing plug when not in use−1
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 84, used with permission. SES ref PF-FS2M-52FY‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‌​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍‌⁠​​​‍‍‌⁠​‌​‌​‌​‌‍‌​⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 84 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

IntervalKeyDescriptionProcedureLubricant/ FluidNo. of Service Points
50 Hours7Cylindrical scrub brushesCheck Taper−2
Rotate front to rear−2
8Scrub head floor skirts (Disk brush heads only)Check for damage and wear−1
14Sweeping assembly side and recirculation skirtsCheck for damage and wear−4
9Front flap skirtCheck for damage and wear−1
9Battery cellsCheck electrolyte levelDW1
26FaST Filter screenClean−1
100 Hours16Cylindrical conveyorCheck for damage and wear−1
17BrakesCheck adjustment−1
18Sweeping brush drive beltsCheck for damage, adjustment or wear−2
19Sweeping vacuum fan beltCheck for damage, adjustment or wear−1
7Cylindrical scrub brush drive beltsCheck for damage, adjustment or and wear−1
14Hopper sealsCheck for damage and wear−5
15Hopper filter and sealsCheck for damage, clean or replace−2
20Hopper lift armsLubricateSPL4
11Machine and tank cover sealsCheck for damage and wear−5
10Hydraulic fluidCheck fluid levelHYDO1
12Front wheel support bearingLubricateSPL1
13Propelling gearboxCheck lubricant levelGL1
22Scrub head drag link arm pivot points (SN 000000−004780)LubricateSPL8(4)
21TiresCheck for damage and wear−3
200 Hours26FaST Air filter (SN 000000−004791)Clean−1
500 Hours12Front wheel■ Torque wheel nuts−1
12Rear wheel bearingsCheck, lubricate, and adjustSPL1
24Scrub head gas springCheck for wear and operation−1
17Steering gear chain■ Check tension and lubricateGL1
20Hopper drive chains■ Check tension and lubricateGL2
24Sweeping vacuum fan motorsCheck motor brushes−2
23Scrubbing vacuum fan motorsCheck motor brushes−2
10Hydraulic hosesCheck for damage and wear−1
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 85, used with permission. SES ref PF-AIIS-LAX2‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍‌​⁠⁠‌‍‌‍‍‍⁠​‍‍‌‍‌‍​⁠⁠⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 85 of 154
MAINTENANCE
IntervalKeyDescriptionProcedureLubricant/FluidNo. of Service Points
1000 Hours13Propelling gearboxChange fill-level plug seals−1
13Change gear lubricantGL1
24Scrubbing brush drive motorsCheck motor brushes−2
25Side brush drive motor(s)Check motor brushes−2
24Sweeping brush drive motorsCheck motor brushes−2
13Propelling motorCheck motor brushes−1
26FaST injector filters (SN 004792− )Replace−2
1200 Hours10Hydraulic fluid filter (opt.)* Change filter element−All
2400 Hours10Hydraulic fluid reservoir (opt.)* Change hydraulic fluidHYDO1
NOTE: Change the hydraulic fluid, filter, and suction strainer, indicated (*), after every 800 hours for machines NOT originally equipped with TennantTrue premium hydraulic fluid. (See Hydraulics section).

SPL − Special lubricant, Lubriplate EMB grease (Tennant part no. 01433−1)
GL − SAE 90 weight gear lubricant
HYDO − TennantTrue premium hydraulic fluid or equivalent
DW − Distilled water‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌‍‌⁠⁠‌‌​‌⁠⁠⁠‌​‍​​​‍‍⁠⁠‌

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 86, used with permission. SES ref PF-7VFI-TMRC‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌‍‌⁠⁠‌‌​‌⁠⁠⁠‌​‍​​​‍‍⁠⁠‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 86 of 154
MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATION

In short This section covers lubricating the propelling gearbox and the front wheel support bearing. Check or change the gear lubricant and grease the bearing at the listed hour intervals, and block or jack the machine safely before servicing.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‍​​‌⁠​⁠⁠‌⁠‌‍⁠​​‌⁠​⁠​‍⁠​

PROPELLING GEARBOX

Check the lubricant level in the propelling gearbox every 100 hours of operation. Change the gear lubricant, and the drain and fill-level plug seals after the first 50 hours of operation, and then every 1000 hours of operation. Use SAE 90 weight gear lubricant.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‍​​‌⁠​⁠⁠‌⁠‌‍⁠​​‌⁠​⁠​‍⁠​

FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, block machine tires before jacking machine up.
Close-up drawing of the propelling gearbox housing with a large black arrow pointing to the plug at the upper right of the housing
05934

FRONT WHEEL SUPPORT BEARING

The front wheel support has two grease fittings for the bearing. Raise the machine so the front wheel is off the floor. Fill one of the grease fittings while rotating the gearbox from stop to stop. Fill the second grease fitting while rotating the gearbox back to the original position. The bearing cavity is full when grease comes out of the fittings, or out of the top seal.

Lubricate with Lubriplate EMB grease (Tennant part no. 01433−1) every 100 hours of machine operation, or after steam cleaning the gearbox area.

Close-up drawing of the gearbox and front wheel support with a large black arrow pointing down to a grease fitting at the left side of the housing
05934
FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, use hoist or jack that will support the weight of the machine.
FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, jack machine up at designated locations only. Block machine up with jack stands.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 87, used with permission. SES ref PF-CT2Q-WAWI‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‍​​‌⁠​⁠⁠‌⁠‌‍⁠​​‌⁠​⁠​‍⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 87 of 154
MAINTENANCE

SCRUB HEAD DRAG LINK ARMS (SN 000000−004780)

In short The scrub head drag link arms have grease fittings at each pivot point that need lubricating every 100 hours of operation. The MaxPro 1000 disk scrub head has four link arms to lubricate and the MaxPro 1200 has two.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍‍​‍​​⁠‌‌‌‌​​​​​​‌⁠‍‌​⁠

The scrub head drag link arms have a grease fitting at each of the pivot points. Lubricate with Lubriplate EMB grease (Tennant Part No. 01433−1) every 100 hours of operation.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍‍​‍​​⁠‌‌‌‌​​​​​​‌⁠‍‌​⁠

The MaxPro 1000 disk scrub head has four link arms that need lubrication.

Photo of the MaxPro 1000 scrub head with two white arrows pointing to the grease fittings at the pivot points of the drag link arms on one side of the scrub head
Photo looking under the MaxPro 1000 scrub head with two white arrows pointing to grease fittings on the drag link arms at the other side

The MaxPro 1200 disk scrub head has two link arms that need lubrication.

Photo of the MaxPro 1200 disk scrub head with two white arrows pointing up to the two link arm pivot points that need grease
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 88, used with permission. SES ref PF-36EA-SPHJ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍‍​‍​​⁠‌‌‌‌​​​​​​‌⁠‍‌​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 88 of 154
MAINTENANCE

The Maxpro 1000 and the Maxpro 1200 cylindrical scrub heads each have two arms that need lubrication.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‌‍​⁠‌‌‌⁠‍​​​​‌​‍⁠⁠

Photo of a cylindrical scrub head arm with two white arrows pointing down at the two lubrication points on the arms

REAR WHEEL BEARINGS

In short The rear wheel bearings are checked for seal damage and repacked and adjusted every 500 hours of operation, using Lubriplate EMB grease.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‌‍​⁠‌‌‌⁠‍​​​​‌​‍⁠⁠

Inspect the rear wheel bearings for seal damage, and repack and adjust every 500 hours of operation. Use Lubriplate EMB grease (Tennant part number 01433−1).

Photo of the rear wheel with a white arrow pointing at the wheel hub, the location of the rear wheel bearing

HOPPER LIFT ARMS

In short Each hopper lift arm has two grease fittings, one at the base of the arm and one at the side of the hopper. Lubricate both with Lubriplate EMB grease every 100 hours of operation.

The hopper lift arms each have two grease fittings. The first pivot point is located down on the base of the arms, close to the machine. Lubricate with Lubriplate EMB grease (Tennant Part No. 01433−1) every 100 hours of operation.

Photo of the base of a hopper lift arm with a white arrow pointing to the first grease fitting at the pivot point

The second pivot points are located close to the sides of the hopper where the hopper lift arms connect. Lubricate with Lubriplate EMB grease (Tennant Part No. 01433−1) every 100 hours of operation.

Photo of the side of the hopper where the lift arm connects, with a white arrow pointing to the second pivot point grease fitting
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 89, used with permission. SES ref PF-MSEZ-VDZK‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‍‍‌‌‌‍​⁠‌‌‌⁠‍​​​​‌​‍⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 89 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

STEERING GEAR CHAIN

In short This page covers three drive chains that need lubricating: the steering gear chain, the hopper lift drive chain and the hopper tilt drive chain. Each one gets SAE 90 weight gear lubricant after the first 50 hours of operation and then every 500 hours.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‍‍‍‍‍​‍​⁠​‌⁠⁠‌‌‍‍‌⁠​​​

The steering gear chain is located by the foot pedals. Lubricate the chain with SAE 90 weight gear lubricant after the first 50, and then after every 500 hours of operation.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‍‍‍‍‍​‍​⁠​‌⁠⁠‌‌‍‍‌⁠​​​

Photo of the steering gear chain and sprocket near the foot pedals, with a white arrow pointing to the chain at the sprocket

HOPPER LIFT DRIVE CHAIN

The hopper lift drive chain is located on the left hand side of the machine, close to the hopper. Lubricate the chain with SAE 90 weight gear lubricant after the first 50, and then after every 500 hours of operation.

Photo of the hopper lift drive chain on the left side of the machine near the hopper, with a white arrow pointing to the chain

HOPPER TILT DRIVE CHAIN

The hopper tilt drive chain is located on the left hand side of the machine, along side the hopper lift arm. Lubricate the chain with SAE 90 weight gear lubricant after the first 50, and then after every 500 hours of operation.

Photo of the hopper tilt drive chain on the left side of the machine alongside the hopper lift arm, with a white arrow pointing down to the chain
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 90, used with permission. SES ref PF-CHS7-C46Q‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌​‍‍‍‍‍​‍​⁠​‌⁠⁠‌‌‍‍‌⁠​​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 90 of 154
MAINTENANCE

HYDRAULICS

HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR

In short The hydraulic reservoir supplies fluid to the lift cylinder and the power steering unit. Check the fluid level every 100 hours of operation and do not overfill it or run it low. Drain and refill after every 2400 hours, and replace the built-in filter every 1200 hours.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‌⁠‌​​​​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‍​⁠‍‌‍​⁠

The hydraulic reservoir holds the hydraulic fluid for the hydrualic lift cylinder and the power steering unit. It is located underneath the front cover of the machine. A filler cap is mounted on top of the reservoir.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‌⁠‌​​​​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‍​⁠‍‌‍​⁠

Hydraulic reservoir under the front cover with a white arrow pointing to the filler cap on top of the reservoir; a white tank is at the right

Check the hydraulic fluid level at operating temperature after every 100 hours of operation. For machines serial number 07329 and below, fill the resrvoir to about50mm (2in) below the top of the reservoir. For machines serial number 07330 and above, fill the resrvoir to about 23mm (1 in) below the top of the reservoir.

Lubricate the filler cap gasket with a film of hydraulic fluid before putting the cap back on the reservoir.

ATTENTION! Do not overfill the hydraulic fluid reservoir or operate the machine with a low level of hydraulic fluid in the reservoir. Damage to the machine hydraulic system may result.

Drain and refill the hydraulic fluid reservoir with new TennantTrue premium hydraulic fluid after every 2400 hours of operation. Machines have a blue colored drop (left photo) on the hydraulic fluid label if originally equipped with TennantTrue premium hydraulic fluid.

Two hydraulic fluid labels side by side with arrows pointing at the drop symbol: the left label has a blue drop (TennantTrue Fluid), the right label has a white drop (Previous Fluid)
TennantTrue Fluid / Previous Fluid
NOTE: Change the hydraulic fluid, filter, and suction strainer after every 800 hours for ALL machines that have NOT consistently used TennantTrue premium hydraulic fluid or equivalent.

The reservoir has a built−in filter outlet that filters hydraulic fluid before it enters the system. Replace the filter every 1200 hours of operation.

Looking into the open hydraulic reservoir with a white arrow pointing to the built-in filter outlet at the bottom
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 91, used with permission. SES ref PF-DF76-ER7P‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‌⁠‌​​​​⁠‍⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‍​⁠‍‌‍​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 91 of 154
MAINTENANCE

HYDRAULIC FLUID

In short This section lists the hydraulic fluid for the machine and warns that substitute fluids must match the Tennant specifications. Keep dirt and contaminants out of the hydraulic system.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠‍​‍‌​⁠⁠‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​⁠‍‌​
TennantTrue premium hydraulic fluid (Extended Life)
Part numberISO GradeCapacity
1057707323.8 L (1 gal)
10577083219 L (5 gal)

If using a locally-available hydraulic fluid, be sure the specifications match the Tennant hydraulic fluid specifications. Substitute fluids can cause premature failure of hydraulic components.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠‍​‍‌​⁠⁠‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​⁠‍‌​

ATTENTION! Hydraulic components depend on system hydraulic fluid for internal lubrication. Malfunctions, accelerated wear, and damage will result if dirt or other contaminants enter the hydraulic system.

HYDRAULIC HOSES

In short Check the hydraulic hoses for wear or damage every 500 hours of operation. Use cardboard to locate leaks, and see a doctor at once if injured by escaping fluid.

Check the hydraulic hoses after every 500 hours of operation for wear or damage.

Fluid escaping at high pressure from a very small hole can be almost invisible, and can cause serious injuries.

See a doctor at once if injury results from escaping hydraulic fluid. Serious infection or reaction can develop if proper medical treatment is not given immediately.

FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, use cardboard to locate leaking hydraulic fluid under pressure.
Drawing of a hand holding a piece of cardboard near a hydraulic leak while the other hand holds a magnifying glass over the spot, showing how to find a leaking hose with cardboard
00002

If you discover a fluid leak, contact your mechanic or supervisor.

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 92, used with permission. SES ref PF-U3PL-3HEO‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠‍​‍‌​⁠⁠‍‌​‍⁠​‍‍​⁠‍‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 92 of 154
MAINTENANCE

BATTERIES

In short This section explains how to get the longest life from the batteries and how to check the electrolyte level of flooded (wet) batteries weekly. Add distilled water only when the level is low, and do not overfill.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠⁠‍‌⁠​‍‌‌​‌‌⁠‌​‌​‍⁠​‍
FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine, stop on level surface, turn off machine, set parking brake (if equipped), and remove key.

The lifetime of the batteries depends on their proper maintenance. To get the most life from the batteries;‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠⁠‍‌⁠​‍‌‌​‌‌⁠‌​‌​‍⁠​‍

  • Do not charge the batteries more than once a day and only after running the machine for a minimum of 15 minutes.
  • Do not leave the batteries partially discharged for long period of time.
  • Only charge the batteries in a well-ventilated area to prevent gas build up. Charge batteries in areas with ambient temperatures 27°C (80°F) or less.
  • Allow the charger to complete charging the batteries before re-using the machine.
  • Maintain the proper electrolyte levels of flooded (wet) batteries by checking levels weekly.

CHECKING THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

The flooded (wet) lead−acid batteries require routine maintenance as described below. Check the battery electrolyte level weekly.

FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, keep all metal objects off batteries. Avoid contact with battery acid.
A gloved hand holds a battery filler bottle over a battery cell opening, with a large arrow pointing to the cell; icons at right show a required-gloves symbol and a required eye-protection symbol
08247

The level should be slightly above the battery plates as shown before charging. Add distilled water if low. DO NOT OVERFILL. The electrolyte will expand and may overflow when charging. After charging, distilled water can be added up to about 3 mm (0.12 in) below the sight tubes.

NOTE: Make sure the battery caps are in place while charging. There may be a sulfur smell after charging batteries. This is normal.
Two battery cell cross-sections side by side, labeled Before Charging and After Charging, showing the electrolyte level slightly above the plates before charging and higher, just below the sight tubes, after charging
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 93, used with permission. SES ref PF-NPKX-P2RE‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠⁠‍‌⁠​‍‌‌​‌‌⁠‌​‌​‍⁠​‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 93 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE−FREE BATTERIES

In short Maintenance-free batteries never need watering, but they still need routine cleaning and checks. Every 200 hours, check connections and clean the battery surfaces; before charging, park the machine on a flat, dry, well-ventilated surface and open the battery compartment covers.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‍​​‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍‌‌‍​‍⁠⁠⁠⁠

Batteries and chargers: make sure your charger is compatible with your batteries, and set its charging algorithm to your battery pack before you use it.

Maintenance−free batteries do not require watering. Cleaning and other routine maintenance is still required.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‍​​‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍‌‌‍​‍⁠⁠⁠⁠

CHECKING CONNECTIONS / CLEANING

After every 200 hours of use check for loose battery connections and clean the surface of the batteries, including terminals and cable clamps, with a strong solution of baking soda and water. Replace any worn or damaged wires. Do not remove battery caps when cleaning batteries.

Supplies for cleaning batteries: safety goggles, green rubber gloves, a measuring cup, a box of baking soda, and a brush resting on top of two red batteries

CHARGING THE BATTERIES

  1. Drive the machine to a flat, dry surface in a well-ventilated area.
  2. Turn the machine power off and set the parking brake.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, turn off machine.
  3. Open the top battery compartment cover. The support arm will engage when the cover is lifted all the way up.
    WARNING: Batteries emit hydrogen gas. Explosion or fire can result. Keep sparks and open flame away. Keep covers open when charging.
  4. Open the rear battery compartment door.
Open top battery compartment cover on the machine with the batteries visible inside; an upward arrow shows lifting the cover and a curved arrow shows the rear battery compartment door opening
NOTE: Make sure the batteries have the proper electrolyte level before charging. See CHECKING THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 94, used with permission. SES ref PF-XSNL-3SOA‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‍​​‍⁠‍‌⁠⁠‍‍⁠‍‌‌‍​‍⁠⁠⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 94 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Unplug the battery connector from the machine connector.
  2. Plug the charger connector into the battery connector.
  3. Plug the battery charger into the wall outlet.
Photo of a hand holding the charger connector next to the battery connector on the machine, with two arrows pointing left and right showing the connectors being plugged together or unplugged
NOTE: If the red “ABNORMAL CYCLE” lamp lights when the TENNANT charger is plugged into a wall outlet, the charger can not charge the battery and there is something wrong with the battery.
  1. The Tennant charger will start automatically. When the batteries are fully charged, the Tennant charger will automatically turn off.
Drawing of the Tennant battery charger seen from the front, with a carrying handle on top, a control panel with indicator lamps, and two cables coming out at the bottom
07224
NOTE: Use a charger with the proper rating for the batteries to prevent damage to the batteries or reduce the battery life.
NOTE: If the charger needs to be disconnected from the machine before the batteries are fully charged and the charger has not automatically shut off, turn off the charger before disconnecting it.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 95, used with permission. SES ref PF-OTF3-5D2S‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‌⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​‍‌​‍​​⁠‍⁠‌​​‌‍‌⁠‌‌⁠‌‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 95 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. After the charger has turned off, unplug the charger from the wall outlet.
  2. Unplug the charger connector from the battery connector on the machine.
  3. Reconnect the battery connector to the machine connector.
  4. Check the electrolyte level in each battery cell before and after charging. If needed, add distilled water to raise the electrolyte level to about 12mm (0.4in) below the bottom of the sight tubes.
FOR SAFETY: When maintaining or servicing machine, avoid contact with battery acid.
Photo of the battery connector under the machine with two arrows pointing toward each other, showing the gray machine connector and the gray battery connector being pushed together by a hand
  1. Close the rear battery compartment door. Disengage the support arm, and close the top battery compartment cover.

CONTROL PANEL

In short The control panel can run a self-diagnostic test of the machine's electrical components and system, during which motors and actuators on the machine will activate. Turn the machine off, hold the logo switch while turning power on, and keep holding it until the down pressure screen appears, then press the TENNANT logo button twice more to reach the SELF TEST screen.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍​​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌​⁠⁠​‍⁠⁠‍​‌‍‍‍‌⁠​‌​‌⁠⁠

The control panel can be used to run a self-diagnostic test of the machine electrical components and system. When the self-diagnostic test is running, motors and actuators on the machine will activate.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍​​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌​⁠⁠​‍⁠⁠‍​‌‍‍‍‌⁠​‌​‌⁠⁠

FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, avoid moving parts. Do not wear loose jackets, shirts, or sleeves.
  1. Turn the machine off.
  2. Press and hold the logo switch.
  3. Turn the machine power on.
  4. Continue pressing the logo switch for 15 seconds or until the down pressure display screen appears.
  5. Press and release the TENNANT logo button two more times. The SELF TEST screen will appear on the display.
Control panel with the display showing a clock reading 12:16 PM and the number 0020, with a large arrow pointing at the TENNANT logo button above the screen and buttons on both sides
353550
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 96, used with permission. SES ref PF-VIEV-PIC3‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍​​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌​⁠⁠​‍⁠⁠‍​‌‍‍‍‌⁠​‌​‌⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 96 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Press the switch next to SELF TEST.
  2. While the diagnostic is running, the machine systems will activate as follows:
    • The brushes and squeegee raise.
    • The rear squeegee lowers and then raises back up.
    • The scrub head lowers and moves out to the edge scrub position. The scrub head moves back in again and raises.
    • The brushes turn on and off.
    • The solution tank auto-fill valve (option) turns on and off.
    • The ES pump turns on and off, if the machine has the ES option.
    • If the machine has FaST / ec−H20, the FaST / ec−H20 system turns on and off.
    • The vacuum fan relay is momentarily energized (the vacuum fan does not turn on).
    • The brushes turn on and off.
    • The recovery tank auto-fill valve (option) turns on and off.
Control panel display showing the menu Self Test, Display Maint. and Enable Maint., with a large arrow pointing to the flashing switch next to Self Test at the upper left of the display
353560
  1. If the electrical system passes the self-diagnostic test, an OK message will appear on the control panel display.

    If the self-diagnostic test finds an error in the system, an error message will appear on the control panel display. Note the error message displayed, and contact the service personnel.
Control panel display showing an OK message, a brush-raise icon and an hourglass with the number 0020, with a large arrow pointing at the OK message
353561
  1. Turn off the diagnostic by turning off the machine power.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 97, used with permission. SES ref PF-5EVA-6AVU‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍​‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​‍‌‌‌‍‍​‍‌‌​​‌‌‍‍⁠‍‌⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 97 of 154
MAINTENANCE

ELECTRIC MOTORS

In short This section gives how often the motors' carbon brushes and the drive motors should be inspected. The sweeping and scrubbing vacuum fan motor brushes are checked more often than the brush drive and propelling motors.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍​‍​​​‌​⁠​​​​⁠⁠‍‌‌‌⁠‍⁠‌​‍‌‍‍⁠⁠‌⁠‍​​

The carbon brushes on the sweeping and scrubbing vacuum fan motors should be inspected every 500 hours of machine operation. The brush drive motors and propelling motor should be inspected every 1000 hours of operation.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍​‍​​​‌​⁠​​​​⁠⁠‍‌‌‌⁠‍⁠‌​‍‌‍‍⁠⁠‌⁠‍​​

PROPELLING CIRCUIT

In short The propelling circuit is a controller in the controller panel that sets forward and reverse speed. Only trained personnel should service it, and the panel must not be steam cleaned or sprayed with water.

The propelling circuit is a transistorized controller. It controls the forward and reverse speed of the machine and is located in the controller panel. The circuit cannot be serviced by the user − only trained personnel should be allowed to work on it. Do not steam clean or spray the panel with water because the electrical system may be damaged.

NOTE: A static discharge grounding strap should be used when servicing the electronic circuitry.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 98, used with permission. SES ref PF-IN5J-74ET‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍​‍​​​‌​⁠​​​​⁠⁠‍‌‌‌⁠‍⁠‌​‍‌‍‍⁠⁠‌⁠‍​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 98 of 154
MAINTENANCE

SWEEPING ASSEMBLY

In short The sweeping assembly lets the machine pick up small debris.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‌‍⁠​‍‌‌⁠​⁠​​​‌‍‍⁠​‌⁠⁠‍

The sweeping assembly allows the machine to pick up small debris.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‌‍⁠​‍‌‌⁠​⁠​​​‌‍‍⁠​‌⁠⁠‍

DUST FILTER

In short The dust filter cleans the air pulled up from the hopper and has a shaker that clears off dust. Shake the filter at the end of every work shift, and check and clean or replace it every 50 hours of operation.

The dust filter filters the air pulled up from the hopper. The dust filter is equipped with a shaker to remove the accumulated dust particles. The dust filter shaker will activate automatically for ten seconds when sweeping stops. It can also be activated by pressing the filter shaker switch.

Shake the dust filter before emptying and cleaning the hopper at the end of every work shift. Check and clean or replace the dust filter every 50 hours of operation.

To clean the dust filter, use one of the following methods:

  • SHAKING − Press the sweep switch to stop sweeping, or press the filter shaker switch.
  • TAPPING − Tap the filter gently on a flat surface, with the dirty side down. Do not damage the edges of the filter element or the filter will not seat properly in the filter frame.
  • AIR − Blow air through the dust filter, opposite the direction of the arrows. This may be done with the dust filter in the machine. Always wear eye protection when using compressed air.
FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, wear eye and ear protection when using pressurized air or water.
Photo of the dust filter seated in its frame inside the machine, a pleated rectangular filter element with a hatched label on its left side
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 99, used with permission. SES ref PF-Z6TW-I2TB‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‌‍⁠​‍‌‌⁠​⁠​​​‌‍‍⁠​‌⁠⁠‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 99 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

REMOVING THE DUST FILTER

In short This procedure removes the dust filter from the hopper. Secure the machine, take off the hopper cover, unplug the filter shaker from the main harness, then lift the filter element out.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‌​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠‌‌‌​​‍​⁠‌‌​‌⁠‍‌‍‌‌​​​
  1. Stop the machine, set the parking brake and turn the machine power off.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine and remove key.
  2. Unlatch both sides of the hopper cover, and remove the hopper cover from the machine.
    Operator lifting the white hopper cover off the machine, with a large arrow pointing up and away from the machine in the direction the cover is removed
  3. Unplug the filter shaker from the main harness.
    Note: Carefully pull the wires apart from the bodies of the plugs. Do not unplug the connections from the shaking mechanism. Do not pull on the wires. Damage could occur to the wires or the shaking mechanism.
    Hand holding the filter shaker wire plugs, with arrows showing the two plug halves being pulled apart, two arrows pointing up and two pointing down, beside the dust filter
  4. Lift the dust filter element out of hopper.
    Operator lifting the dust filter element up out of the hopper, with an arrow pointing up and to the left showing the lifting direction
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 100, used with permission. SES ref PF-UBTC-2IYA‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‌​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠‌‌‌​​‍​⁠‌‌​‌⁠‍‌‍‌‌​​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 100 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Cut any cables ties securing the VCS™ system filter shaker to the filter, and lift the VCS™ system filter shaker off of the filter.
Photo of a hand lifting the filter shaker off the wire-mesh filter, with an arrow pointing upward showing the lift direction
  1. Clean or discard the Instant Access™ filter as required.
  1. Place the VCS™ system filter shaker onto the new or cleaned filter. Use care to insert the shaking pin into the filter comb correctly.
Photo of the filter shaker being placed onto the mesh filter, with an arrow pointing left toward the shaking pin that goes into the filter comb
  1. Place the edges of the shaker firmly between the filter and the filter seal. Secure the VCS™ system filter shaker to the filter with cable ties.
NOTE: When installed properly, the shaker plate cannot move in either front−to−back or side−to−side directions. If the shaker is loose, it will not function properly.
Photo of a thumb pressing the edge of the shaker between the filter and the filter seal, with an arrow pointing upward
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 101, used with permission. SES ref PF-LTBT-UDID‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​⁠‌‍​‍‍‍⁠​​⁠‌⁠​⁠​‍​⁠‌⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 101 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. The filter shaker should lay flat against the filter. Check to make sure the comb tab is not caught below the filter shaker plate.
Close-up of the filter shaker assembly with a large arrow pointing to where the shaker plate meets the filter, to check that the comb tab is not caught below the plate
9
  1. Check the shaker solenoid gap with the end of the shipping tab. The gap should be the same width as the tab. If it is not, loosen the mounting screws, adjust the gap by repositioning the shaker solenoid, then retighten the screws.
Shaker solenoid area with three arrows pointing to the solenoid, its mounting screws and the gap beside the shipping tab, with a tool resting at the gap
10
  1. Return the filter back into the machine. Fasten the VCS™ system filter shaker to the filter with two new cable ties.
A person sliding the filter back into the machine, with a large arrow showing the direction the filter is pushed in
11
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 102, used with permission. SES ref PF-43DL-4GIM‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍⁠‍‍‌‍⁠​‍‌​‍‌⁠⁠⁠‌‍‍‍‌​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 102 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Reconnect the main harness to the shaker mechanism.
Hand holding the main wiring harness connectors near the filter shaker mechanism, with four white arrows pointing at the harness connection points
  1. Check the dust filter seals.
Dust filter panel seen from above in its housing, with two white arrows pointing at the filter seals along the edges
  1. Replace hopper cover and secure with latches.
Person lowering the hopper cover into place, with a white arrow pointing at the latch area

THERMO SENTRY

In short The Thermo Sentry senses the temperature of the air pulled up from the hopper and stops the vacuum fan air flow if there is a fire. If it trips, drive to a safe location, open the hopper, remove the source of heat, and turn the machine off and on to reset it.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠​​‍​⁠‍‍‌‍‌⁠⁠​​​‌‌‌​‍​

The Thermo Sentry senses the temperature of the air pulled up from the hopper. If there is a fire in the hopper, the Thermo Sentry stops the vacuum fan air flow.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠​​‍​⁠‍‍‌‍‌⁠⁠​​​‌‌‌​‍​

If this occurs, drive the machine to a safe location, open the hopper and eliminate the source of heat. Turn the machine off and back on to reset the Thermo Sentry.

Hand holding the Thermo Sentry sensor near the filter panel, with a white arrow pointing at the sensor connector
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 103, used with permission. SES ref PF-LOCZ-X7PG‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠​​‍​⁠‍‍‌‍‌⁠⁠​​​‌‌‌​‍​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 103 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

MAIN SWEEPING BRUSH

In short The main sweeping brush sweeps small debris into the debris hopper and should be inspected daily for wear, damage and tangled string or wire. Replace the brushes when they no longer clean effectively; the replacement procedure starts with lowering the sweeping assembly and shutting the machine off.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‍​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌​‌‌‌​‍‍​⁠​‍‍​​‌⁠‌⁠​​⁠

The main sweeping brush is cylindrical and spans the width of the sweeping assembly. The brush sweeps small debris into the debris hopper.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‍​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌​‌‌‌​‍‍​⁠​‍‍​​‌⁠‌⁠​​⁠

The brush should be inspected daily for wear and damage. Remove any string or wire found tangled on the brush, brush drive hub, or brush idler.

Check the main brush pattern every time a new brush is installed. Replace the brushes when they no longer clean effectively.

REPLACING THE MAIN SWEEPING BRUSH

  1. Lower the sweeping assembly.
  2. Turn the machine power off when the brush just touches the floor, and set the parking brake.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine and remove key.
  3. Control panel display with the Tennant logo and a large black arrow pointing to the top right button, which has a flashing indicator light; the other two buttons on that side also show flashing lights
    353573
  4. Unlatch and open the right side main brush door.
  5. Remove the hardware mounting the brush idler plate to brush arm.
Photo of the brush arm area with three white arrows pointing to the hardware that mounts the brush idler plate to the brush arm
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 104, used with permission. SES ref PF-EHRR-D22B‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‍​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌​‌‌‌​‍‍​⁠​‍‍​​‌⁠‌⁠​​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 104 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Remove the idler plate and the old brush.
Hand holding the new cylindrical sweeping brush as it is pushed into the machine, with a white arrow pointing at the brush showing the direction of installation
  1. Install the new brush in the machine. Line up the drive end of the new brush with the drive plug.
  1. Install the idler plate to the brush arm with the mounting hardware.
Idler plate being installed on the brush arm, with two white arrows pointing up at the plate mounting points
  1. Check the brush pattern as described in CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE SWEEPING MAIN BRUSH PATTERN.
  2. Close and latch the main brush door.

CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE MAIN SWEEPING BRUSH PATTERN

In short This procedure checks the pattern the main sweeping brush leaves on a chalked floor. The first steps are to chalk a smooth, level floor, turn the machine power on, and position the raised sweeping assembly over the chalked area.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​​​⁠‌‍‌​‍⁠​​​⁠​‌​⁠‌‍‌‍‍‌‍
  1. Apply chalk, or some other material that will not blow away easily, to a smooth, level floor.
  2. Turn the machine power on.
Operator control panel with display, buttons and emergency stop, and a curved white arrow around the key switch showing the key being turned to switch the machine power on
  1. With the sweeping assembly raised, position the sweeping assembly over the chalked area.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 105, used with permission. SES ref PF-PPY2-YVJN‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​​​⁠‌‍‌​‍⁠​​​⁠​‌​⁠‌‍‌‍‍‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 105 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. With a foot on the brake to keep the machine from moving, lower the sweeping assembly to the floor for 15 to 20 seconds.
  2. Raise the sweeping assembly and back the machine away from the test area.
NOTE: If no chalk or other material is available, allow the brush to spin on the floor for two minutes.
  1. Look at the main brush pattern made. The pattern should measure evenly 50 to 75 mm (2 to 3 in) across the length of the brush.
Even main brush pattern: a long narrow rectangle inside a gray rounded area, with arrows and lines at the left end marking the pattern width
00582
  1. If the brush pattern is tapered more than 15 mm (0.50 in) from one end of the pattern to the other, the main brush needs to be leveled.
Tapered main brush pattern: a wedge-shaped strip inside a gray rounded area, wider at the left end and narrower at the right end
00601

To level the main brush, open the right side brush panel. Loosen the hex nut on the adjustment screw, and raise or lower the adjustment screw to raise or lower the main sweeping brush. Tighten the nut on the adjustment screw.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​‍⁠⁠‍​​⁠​​‍​​​⁠⁠⁠​‍‌‍⁠⁠

Photo of a hand using a wrench on the adjustment screw and hex nut of the main brush inside the open right side brush panel
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 106, used with permission. SES ref PF-766X-OJTL‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​‍⁠⁠‍​​⁠​​‍​​​⁠⁠⁠​‍‌‍⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 106 of 154
MAINTENANCE

CYLINDRICAL CONVEYOR

In short The cylindrical conveyor lifts small debris from the main sweeping brush into the debris hopper. It is inspected every 100 hours and replaced when the bristles measure 30 mm (1.25 in) or less; this page begins the replacement steps.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍​​‍⁠‌​​⁠​​​‍‍​​‌⁠​​​‍‌

The cylindrical conveyor operates above the main sweeping brush, and spans the width of the sweeping assembly. The cylindrical conveyor lifts small debris swept up by the main sweeping brush, into the debris hopper.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍​​‍⁠‌​​⁠​​​‍‍​​‌⁠​​​‍‌

The conveyor should be inspected every 100 hours of operation for wear and damage. Remove any string or wire found tangled on the conveyor, drive hub, or idler.

Check the cylindrical conveyor every time the main sweeping brush is replaced. The conveyor should be replaced whenever the bristles measure 30 mm (1.25 in) or less in length.

REPLACING THE CYLINDRICAL CONVEYOR

  1. Turn the machine power off and set the parking brake.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine and remove key.
    Machine control panel with a curved arrow showing the key switch being turned to the off position
  2. Unlatch and open the right side main brush door.
  3. Remove the hardware mounting the idler plate to the conveyor.
    A hand at the idler plate area of the conveyor, with three arrows pointing to the mounting hardware to remove
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 107, used with permission. SES ref PF-3GJD-ZQYP‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍​​‍⁠‌​​⁠​​​‍‍​​‌⁠​​​‍‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 107 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Remove the idler plate and the old cylindrical conveyor.
Photo of a hand reaching into the side of the machine to remove the idler plate and old cylindrical conveyor, with a white arrow pointing at the idler plate area
  1. Engage the hopper support bar. See the ENGAGING THE HOPPER SUPPORT BAR section of the manual.
  2. Install the new cylindrical conveyor into the machine. Reach under the debris hopper to help guide the conveyor onto the drive plug.
Photo looking under the debris hopper as a hand guides the new cylindrical conveyor brush into place, with a white arrow pointing at the end of the conveyor
  1. Install the cylindrical conveyor idler plate with the mounting hardware.
  2. Close and latch the main brush door.
  3. Disengage the hopper support bar. See the DISENGAGING THE HOPPER SUPPORT BAR section of the manual.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 108, used with permission. SES ref PF-QJMM-JIHL‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍​‌‌‌​⁠‍​‌‍⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌⁠⁠‍​‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 108 of 154
MAINTENANCE

SIDE SWEEPING BRUSH

In short The side brush(es) sweep debris into the path of the main brush and should be checked daily for wear, damage or tangled string or wire. The page covers how to replace the side brush and how to adjust its floor pattern with the adjustment knob.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌⁠‌‌⁠‌‍‌‍​⁠⁠⁠​‌‍‌​​‍‍​

The side sweeping brush(es) sweep debris into the path of the main brush. Check the side brush(es) daily for wear or damage. Remove any string or wire found tangled on the side brush(es) or side brush drive shafts.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌⁠‌‌⁠‌‍‌‍​⁠⁠⁠​‌‍‌​​‍‍​

The side sweeping brush(es) pattern should be checked periodically. The side brush bristles should contact the floor in a 10 o’clock to 3 o’clock pattern when the brush is in motion. The side brush pattern adjustment is made by turning the side brush adjustment knob.

Replace the brushes when they no longer clean effectively.

Diagram of the side brush seen from above, with bristles fanned out and arrows showing the sweep pattern from the 10 o'clock to the 3 o'clock position, sweeping debris toward the machine's path
03376

REPLACING AND ADJUSTING THE SIDE SWEEPING BRUSH(ES)

  1. Turn the machine power off and set the parking brake.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine and remove key.
  2. Remove the retaining hardware mounting the side brush to the side brush drive shaft.
  3. Slide the side brush off the side brush drive shaft.
  4. Slide the new side brush onto the side brush drive shaft.
  5. Mount the new side brush to the drive shaft with the mounting hardware.
  6. Lower the hopper assembly
  7. Check the side brush pattern. To increase the bristle contact with the floor, turn the side brush adjustment knob counter-clockwise. To decrease, turn the side brush adjustment knob clockwise.
Photo of the side brush area on the machine, with a white arrow pointing to the black side brush adjustment knob above the bristles touching the floor
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 109, used with permission. SES ref PF-N5UV-2X2G‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌⁠‌‌⁠‌‍‌‍​⁠⁠⁠​‌‍‌​​‍‍​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 109 of 154
MAINTENANCE

SCRUB HEAD

In short The machine can have a disk or cylindrical scrub head, each in two widths, and the floor skirts control water spray from the brushes. The page also says to check the scrub head gas spring every 500 hours and not to change the factory adjustments on the cylindrical head unless parts are damaged or replaced.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‌​​​⁠​‍⁠⁠‌​‌⁠⁠‌‍​​‌‍⁠⁠

The machine can be equipped with either disk or cylindrical heads. There are two scrub head widths available for each type of scrub head. The scrub head floor skirts control water spray from the brushes.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‌​​​⁠​‍⁠⁠‌​‌⁠⁠‌‍​​‌‍⁠⁠

The MaxPro 1000 disc head has two disks, and a 1020 mm (40 in) scrubbing path. The MaxPro 1200 disc head has three disks, and a 1220 mm (48 in) path.

The MaxPro 1000 cylindrical head has a 1020 mm (40 in) scrubbing path, and the MaxPro 1200 cylindrical head has a 1220 mm (48 in) path.

SCRUB HEAD GAS SPRING

Check the scrub head gas spring for wear and proper operation every 500 hours of operation.

Photo of the machine's underside near the scrub head with a white arrow pointing up at the scrub head gas spring, with a tire at the right

SCRUB HEAD ADJUSTMENTS

The cylindrical scrub head is factory adjusted, and the measurements should not be changed unless scrub head parts are damaged or are replaced.

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 110, used with permission. SES ref PF-BQHL-BJ35‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‌​​​⁠​‍⁠⁠‌​‌⁠⁠‌‍​​‌‍⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 110 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

SCRUB BRUSHES

In short Scrub brushes should be checked daily for tangled wire or string and for damage and wear. Worn disk brushes are replaced in sets, starting with the scrub head raised, the power off and the parking brake set.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌​⁠‌‍​‍​‍‌‍‌‍⁠‍⁠‌‌‌‌⁠​⁠‌

The machine can be equipped with either disk or cylindrical scrub brushes. Check scrub brushes daily for wire or string tangled around the brush or brush drive hub. Also check for brush damage and wear.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌​⁠‌‍​‍​‍‌‍‌‍⁠‍⁠‌‌‌‌⁠​⁠‌

DISK BRUSHES

Replace the brushes when they no longer clean effectively.

NOTE: Replace worn brushes in sets. Scrubbing with brushes of unequal bristle length will result in diminished scrubbing performance.

REPLACING THE DISK BRUSHES

  1. Raise the scrub head.
  2. Turn the machine power off and set the parking brake.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine, stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine, and remove key.
  3. Raise the side squeegee and lock in the up position using the side squeegee double scrub latches.
    Photo of the side squeegee being raised by hand, with a curved arrow pointing to the side squeegee double scrub latch that holds it in the up position
  4. Turn the brush until you can see the brush spring clip.
    Photo looking up at the underside of the machine with two arrows pointing to the brush spring clip on the brush
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 111, used with permission. SES ref PF-ZFYY-VFQM‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌‍⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌​⁠‌‍​‍​‍‌‍‌‍⁠‍⁠‌‌‌‌⁠​⁠‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 111 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Squeeze the brush spring clips together with your thumb and index finger. The brush will drop off the brush drive hub. Pull the brush out from under the scrub head.
Operator reaching under the scrub head with one hand to squeeze the brush spring clips by the brush drive hub, so the brush drops off
  1. Place the new scrub brush on the floor in front of the scrub head. Push the brush under the scrub head.
  2. Line up the brush drive socket with the drive plug.
  3. While squeezing the brush spring clip together with your thumb and index finger, lift the scrub brush onto the drive plug.
Operator sliding the new scrub brush across the floor under the scrub head, with a large arrow pointing toward the scrub head
  1. Check to make sure the brush is securely mounted on the brush drive hub.
  2. Lift up on the side squeegee while releasing the side squeegee double scrub latches. Lower the side squeegee to the down position.
Hand lifting the side squeegee beside the scrub head, with a curved arrow showing the squeegee being raised and lowered past the latches
  1. Repeat for the other brush.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 112, used with permission. SES ref PF-BEBS-KM2K‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠​​​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‍​⁠​‌⁠‍⁠​‍⁠⁠‍‍‍⁠‍‍‌⁠⁠‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 112 of 154
MAINTENANCE

CYLINDRICAL BRUSHES

In short Cylindrical brushes should be checked for taper and rotated front-to-rear every 50 hours of operation, and replaced when they no longer clean well. To check the brush pattern, scrub on a chalked floor area, then raise the head and look at the result.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍⁠‍‍​‍‌​​‌⁠⁠‍‌‌⁠​‌‌​‍‍‌

Check the brush taper and rotate the brushes from front-to-rear every 50 hours of machine operation for maximum brush life and best scrubbing performance. Check and clean the cylindrical head debris trough daily.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍⁠‍‍​‍‌​​‌⁠⁠‍‌‌⁠​‌‌​‍‍‌

Replace the brushes when they no longer clean effectively.

NOTE: Replace worn brushes in pairs. Scrubbing with brushes of unequal bristle length will result in diminished scrubbing performance.
NOTE: Fill the solution tank before checking or adjusting the brush pattern.

CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CYLINDRICAL BRUSH PATTERN

  1. Apply chalk (or another material that will not easily blow away), to a smooth, level section of the floor.
  2. Set the parking brake.
Photo of the operator foot area of the machine with a white arrow pointing to the parking brake pedal next to the larger accelerator pedal
  1. Lower the scrub head in the chalked area. Allow the machine to scrub in the same place for 15 to 20 seconds.
NOTE: If chalk or other material is not available, allow the brushes to spin on the floor for two minutes. A polish mark will remain on the floor.
  1. Raise the scrub head and move the machine away from the chalked area. Turn the machine power off.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 113, used with permission. SES ref PF-W53H-Q2YQ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍⁠‍‍​‍‌​​‌⁠⁠‍‌‌⁠​‌‌​‍‍‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 113 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Observe the shape of the brush patterns. If the brush patterns have parallel sides, the brushes do not need adjustment.
Brush pattern on the floor with two parallel-sided strips, showing brushes that do not need adjustment
10355

If one, or both of the brush patterns are tapered, the brushes need adjustment to straighten the brush pattern.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠​‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌​​‌​‍​​⁠‌‍‍⁠‍‌‌‍⁠‌​‌​‌‍

Brush pattern on the floor where the upper strip is tapered, showing brushes that need adjustment
10356
  1. Open the side squeegee support door with the latch. Swing the support door outward to access the idler support cover.
Photo of a hand pointing at the idler support cover behind the opened side squeegee support door, with a white arrow pointing down at it
  1. Loosen the larger mounting screw on the outside of the idler door.
Photo of a hand using a wrench to loosen the larger mounting screw on the outside of the idler door, with a curved arrow showing the turning direction
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 114, used with permission. SES ref PF-MS6S-7AOF‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠​‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌​​‌​‍​​⁠‌‍‍⁠‍‌‌‍⁠‌​‌​‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 114 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Raise or lower the end of the brush with the smaller brush adjustment screw as needed to straighten the brush pattern.
A hand turning the brush adjustment screw with a tool, with two curved arrows showing the screw can be turned in either direction to raise or lower the end of the brush
  1. Tighten the mounting screw to secure the brush.
  2. Close the side squeegee support door. Check the brush patterns again and readjust as necessary until both patterns are the same.
  1. If one brush pattern is wider than the other, the scrub head needs to be leveled.
Framed illustration of a floor with two bands, showing the brush patterns left by the two brushes
350630

Level the scrub head by turning the top scrub head drag link arm on both sides of the scrub head.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠⁠⁠​​⁠‌‍‍⁠⁠​‌​⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍​‌⁠

Check the brush patterns again and readjust as necessary until both patterns are the same.

View under the machine of the scrub head drag link arm with rod ends, and an upward arrow showing the direction to turn the arm to level the scrub head
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 115, used with permission. SES ref PF-IGIU-H355‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠⁠⁠​​⁠‌‍‍⁠⁠​‌​⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍​‌⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 115 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

REPLACING THE CYLINDRICAL BRUSHES

In short This procedure covers taking the old cylindrical brush out of the scrub head. Stop the machine, set the parking brake, open the side squeegee support door, release the idler support cover, and pull the old brush out.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‌​​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‌⁠⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍⁠‍‌​‌⁠​‍​⁠​⁠​⁠
  1. Press the scrubbing switch. When the scrub head is approximately 25 mm (1 in) from the floor, turn the machine power off.
  2. Set the parking brake.
FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine, stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine, and remove key.
  1. Open the side squeegee support door with the latch. Swing the support door outward to access the idler support cover.
A hand points at the latch on the side squeegee support door area, with a large white arrow pointing down at the latch
  1. Lift up on the idler support latch to release the idler support cover.
A hand lifts the idler support latch upward to release the idler support cover, with a large white arrow pointing up
  1. Pull the idler plug off the brush, and pull the old brush out of the scrub head.
The cylindrical brush in the scrub head with the idler plug at its end; a large white arrow points at the idler plug to be pulled off
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 116, used with permission. SES ref PF-QBVD-KB4Y‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‌​​​​‌​⁠​​‍​‌⁠⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍⁠‍‌​‌⁠​‍​⁠​⁠​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 116 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Position the brush with the double row end towards you. Guide the new brush onto the drive hub.
Photo of a cylindrical scrub brush being guided onto the drive hub, with a white arrow pointing toward the hub
NOTE: Cylindrical scrub brushes must be installed with the herringbone patterns on the brushes pointing towards each other for best debris pick up.
Drawing of two cylindrical scrub brushes with herringbone patterns pointing towards each other
  1. Insert the Idler plug (on the inside of the idler support cover), into the brush.
  2. Secure the idler support cover with the idler support latch.
Photo of a hand securing the idler support cover with the idler support latch, with a white arrow pointing down at the latch
  1. Firmly close the side squeegee support door. Check that the door bumper is tight against the debris tray.
  2. Repeat for the other brush on the other side of the scrub head.
Photo of the side squeegee support door being closed against the debris tray, with a down arrow and a curved arrow showing the door closing
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 117, used with permission. SES ref PF-VSYW-FAUN‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​‌‍‍​⁠‍‌⁠‌⁠⁠⁠​‍​⁠⁠‍‌⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 117 of 154
MAINTENANCE

SOLUTION SYSTEM

In short This section covers the solution valve, which controls solution flow to the scrub brushes, and how its control cable can be adjusted. It also explains the solution lever clevis mounting holes and when to drain and clean the recovery tank.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍‍​​⁠⁠‌⁠‍​⁠‍​‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌‌​

SOLUTION VALVE

The solution valve controls the flow of solution to the scrub brushes. The valve linkage should provide the valve with fully open to fully closed positions.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍‍​​⁠⁠‌⁠‍​⁠‍​‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌‌​

The solution control cable can be adjusted at the solution lever or valve ends of the cable. To adjust the cable at the solution lever end, open the machine cover. To adjust the cable at the solution valve end of the cable, locate the valve by the scrub head. Adjust the cable with the valve in the off position.

Photo of the solution valve and control cable near the scrub head, with a white arrow pointing up at the valve

The solution lever has two mounting holes for the solution cable clevis. In the factory, the cable is mounted on the inside hole. The cable clevis can be moved to the outside hole for greater solution flow to the floor. This mounting position would be for rough floor conditions only.

Line drawing of the solution lever area with a black arrow pointing down at the cable clevis mounted on the lever
352716

RECOVERY TANK

The recovery tank stores recovered solution.

The recovery tank should be drained and cleaned daily, after the solution tank is empty, whenever the float stops the vacuum fan, or the recovery tank full indicator lights. See DRAINING AND CLEANING THE TANKS section of this manual.

Photo of the recovery tank drain hose end with a white arrow pointing at the drain cap
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 118, used with permission. SES ref PF-7EPZ-LLGV‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍‍‍​​⁠⁠‌⁠‍​⁠‍​‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 118 of 154
MAINTENANCE

The vacuum fan filter should be cleaned daily. See DRAINING AND CLEANING THE TANKS section of this manual.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠‌​‌‌‍‍​⁠​​‍‌‍‌‍‌‌‌​‌​⁠

Vacuum fan filter, a panel-style filter with a pleated edge, lifted out of the opening in the tank cover, with an arrow pointing to the filter

ES option: The ES filter should be cleaned daily.

The outside of the tank can be cleaned with vinyl cleaner.

Cylindrical mesh ES filter fitted at a hose connection inside the machine, with an arrow pointing to it

SOLUTION TANK

In short The solution tank holds the cleaning solution and needs no regular maintenance. If deposits form on the bottom, rinse it with a strong blast of warm water and drain it with the solution tank drain hose. With the ES option, drain and clean the tank daily.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠‌​‌‌‍‍​⁠​​‍‌‍‌‍‌‌‌​‌​⁠

The solution tank stores the cleaning solution.

The solution tank does not require regular maintenance. If deposits form on the bottom of the tank, rinse the tank with a strong blast of warm water. The tank can be flushed through the fill opening. Drain the tank with the solution tank drain hose.

Top of the solution tank with an arrow pointing to the fill opening

ES option: The solution tank should be drained and cleaned daily. Rinse the solution outlet filters at the bottom of the tank through the drain access.

Drain access at the bottom of the solution tank with an arrow pointing to the solution outlet filter
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 119, used with permission. SES ref PF-W4RJ-6SK4‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠‌​‌‌‍‍​⁠​​‍‌‍‌‍‌‌‌​‌​⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 119 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

FaST SYSTEM

In short This section covers cleaning three parts of the FaST system: the supply hose connector, the filter screen and the air pump filter. Each has its own cleaning interval or condition given below.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‍​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​​‌⁠⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌‍‍‍‍⁠‌‌‌‌‌‌‌

FaST SUPPLY HOSE CONNECTOR

The FaST supply hose connector is located below the FaST PAK holder. Soak the connector in warm water if detergent buildup is visible. When a FaST PAK carton is not installed, store the supply hose connector on the storing plug to prevent the hose from clogging.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‍​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​​‌⁠⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌‍‍‍‍⁠‌‌‌‌‌‌‌

Hand holding the FaST supply hose connector below the FaST PAK holder, with two arrows pointing at the connector and the storing plug above it

FaST SYSTEM FILTER SCREEN

The FaST system filter screen is located under the solution tank and filters the water from the solution tank as it flows into the FaST system.

Remove the filter screen bowl and clean the filter screen after every 50 hours of machine operation. Empty the solution tank before removing the filter.

Clear filter screen bowl under the solution tank with an arrow pointing to the filter screen inside it

FaST SYSTEM AIR PUMP FILTER (SN 000000−004791)

The FaST system air pump filter is located on the side of the air pump.

Remove and clean out the air filter with compressed air after every 200 hours of FaST scrubbing.

FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, wear eye protection when using pressurized air or water.
Hand removing the air filter on the side of the FaST air pump, with an arrow pointing to the filter
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 120, used with permission. SES ref PF-MXXW-ZAHW‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‍​​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​​​‌⁠⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌‍‍‍‍⁠‌‌‌‌‌‌‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 120 of 154
MAINTENANCE

FaST SYSTEM AIR PUMP FILTER (S/N 004792− )

In short This section says where the FaST system injector filters are and when to replace them. Replace them after every 1000 hours of operation, and empty the solution tank first.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠​⁠‌⁠⁠​​​‌‌⁠‍​⁠⁠⁠‌​⁠‍⁠​

The FaST system injector filters are located under the FaST−PAK holder.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠​⁠‌⁠⁠​​​‌‌⁠‍​⁠⁠⁠‌​⁠‍⁠​

Photo of the plumbing under the FaST-PAK holder, with brass fittings, braided hoses and a filter housing; a white arrow points to the injector filter location

Replace the FaST system injector filters after every 1000 hours of operation. Empty the solution tank before replacing the filters.

Photo of the disassembled injector parts on a wooden surface, with white arrows pointing to the two small white injector filters
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 121, used with permission. SES ref PF-P5TU-URFH‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠​⁠‌⁠⁠​​​‌‌⁠‍​⁠⁠⁠‌​⁠‍⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 121 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

ec−H2O MODULE FLUSH PROCEDURE

In short This flush is only needed when an alarm sounds and the ec−H2O system indicator light blinks red. The steps move the hoses so the system draws white or rice vinegar into a bucket, and the key is then turned on.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍⁠‌​​​‍‍⁠‍‍⁠​‍‌‌‍​‍‌‌⁠‍

This procedure is only required when an alarm sounds and the ec−H2O system indicator light begins to blink red.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍⁠‌​​​‍‍⁠‍‍⁠​‍‌‌‍​‍‌‌⁠‍

  1. Remove the siphon hose from the retainer.
Hand pulling the siphon hose fitting out of its retainer inside the machine, with a white arrow pointing down at the retainer area
  1. Disconnect the ec−H2O system intake hose from the solution supply hose and the ec−H2O system outlet hose from the hose to the scrub head.
  2. Connect the siphon hose to the ec−H2O system intake hose and place the siphon hose into container containing 2 gallons (7.6 liters) of white or rice vinegar.
View of the ec-H2O module hoses and pump in the machine, with two white arrows pointing to the intake hose connection at the solution supply hose and the outlet hose connection
NOTE: Use white or rice vinegar only. The acidity level should be between 4−8%. Do not use other acids for this procedure.
FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, wear protective gloves and eye protection when handling vinegar.
  1. Place the ec−H2O system intake hose into a empty bucket.
Two clear hoses running from the machine, one into an orange bucket and one into a jug of vinegar, with white arrows pointing at each hose
  1. Turn the key to the on ( I ) position.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 122, used with permission. SES ref PF-3O56-6QBB‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍⁠‌​​​‍‍⁠‍‍⁠​‍‌‌‍​‍‌‌⁠‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 122 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Press the top of the ec−H2O switch to place the ec−H2O system into low.
NOTE: The ec−H2O system must be placed into low before it can be flushed.
Close-up of the ec-H2O panel with a white arrow pointing to the top of the black rocker switch, next to a safety decal
  1. Press and release the ec−H20 module flush switch to start the flush cycle.
NOTE: The module will automatically shut off when the flush cycle is complete (approx. 7 minutes). The module must run the full 7 minute cycle in order to reset the system indicator light and alarm.
View into the machine compartment with a white arrow pointing to the flush switch on the black ec-H2O module
  1. After the 7 minute flush cycle, remove the siphon hose from the container of vinegar and place the siphon hose into a container of cool clean water. Press the flush switch again to rinse out any remaining vinegar from the module. After 1−2 minutes, press the flush switch to turn off the module.
  2. Disconnect the siphon hose from the ec−H2O system intake hose.
  3. Reconnect ec−H20 intake and outlet hoses. If the ec−H2O system indicator light continues to flash, repeat the flush procedure. If the problem persists, contact an Authorized Service Center.
  4. Reconnect the siphon hose to the retainer and neatly coil the hose for storage.
View of the ec-H2O module in the machine with a white arrow pointing to the retainer where the siphon hose is reconnected
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 123, used with permission. SES ref PF-TTUO-IFSL‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠​⁠‌​​‌‌‍‌‍⁠⁠​‌‌⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 123 of 154
MAINTENANCE

SQUEEGEES

In short The squeegees wipe dirty solution off the floor so it can be drawn into the recovery tank. Check the blades daily for damage and wear, and check leveling and deflection daily or when scrubbing a different type of floor.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠​‌‌​⁠‍‍⁠‌‍​​‌⁠‍​⁠​‌‍​​

As the machine travels forward the squeegees wipe the dirty solution off the floor, which is then picked up and drawn into the recovery tank. The front blade channels the water, and the rear blade wipes the floor.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠​‌‌​⁠‍‍⁠‌‍​​‌⁠‍​⁠​‌‍​​

The side squeegees control water spray and channel water into the path of the rear squeegee.

REAR SQUEEGEE

Check the squeegee blades for damage and wear daily. Rotate or replace either of the squeegee blades if the leading edge is torn or worn half-way through the thickness of the blade.

The squeegee can be adjusted for leveling and deflection. The deflection and leveling of the squeegee blades should be checked daily, or when scrubbing a different type of floor.

Photo of the rear of the machine on a floor, with the curved rear squeegee blade across the back and a white arrow pointing up at the squeegee

LEVELING THE REAR SQUEEGEE

Leveling of the squeegee assures even contact the length of the squeegee blade with the surface being scrubbed. Make sure this adjustment is done on an even, level floor.

  1. Turn the machine power on.
  2. Lower the squeegee.
  3. Set the machine parking brake while the driving machine slowly forward, and turn the machine power off.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine and remove key.
  4. Look at the deflection of the squeegee blade, over the full length of the squeegee blade.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 124, used with permission. SES ref PF-IBBJ-XPD2‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠​‌‌​⁠‍‍⁠‌‍​​‌⁠‍​⁠​‌‍​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 124 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. If the deflection is not the same over the full length of the blade, adjust the deflection by turning the leveling adjustment screw.

    Turn the leveling adjustment screw clockwise to increase the deflection at the ends of the squeegee blade.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠‌‌‌‍‌‌⁠‌⁠‌​‌‍‍⁠​‍‍‌‌‌

    Turn the leveling adjustment screw counter-clockwise to decrease the deflection at the ends of the squeegee blade.

  2. Release the parking brake and drive the machine forward again with the squeegee down to check the squeegee blade deflection.
  3. Readjust the squeegee level if necessary.
Photo of the squeegee mounting area showing a white vacuum hose attached to the squeegee and a large white arrow pointing to the leveling adjustment screw

ADJUSTING REAR SQUEEGEE BLADE DEFLECTION

In short This procedure checks how much the rear squeegee blade curls when the machine moves forward with the squeegee lowered. You check the deflection with the machine stopped and the parking brake set, and the correct amount is 15 to 20 mm (0.50 to 0.75 in).‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠‌‌‌‍‌‌⁠‌⁠‌​‌‍‍⁠​‍‍‌‌‌

Deflection is the amount of curl the squeegee blade has when the machine moves forward with the squeegee lowered to the floor. The best deflection is when the squeegee wipes the floor just dry with a minimum amount of deflection.

  1. Turn the machine power on.
  2. Lower the squeegee.
  3. Set the machine parking brake while driving the machine slowly forward, and turn the machine power off.
    FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine and remove key.
  4. Look at the deflection of the squeegee blade. The correct amount of deflection is 15 to 20 mm (0.50 to 0.75 in).
Side profile of a curled squeegee blade touching the floor line, with a dimension arrow marking the deflection as 15 to 20 mm (0.50 to 0.75 in)
03719
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 125, used with permission. SES ref PF-IQG4-CIUZ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​⁠‌‌‌‍‌‌⁠‌⁠‌​‌‍‍⁠​‍‍‌‌‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 125 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

  1. To adjust the amount of deflection, loosen the caster jam nut. Turn the caster shaft using the flats.

    Turn the shaft clockwise to decrease the blade deflection. Turn the shaft counter-clockwise to increase blade deflection. Tighten the jam nut.
Photo of the squeegee caster and shaft with a white arrow pointing at the caster jam nut and shaft where the blade deflection is adjusted
NOTE: Be sure to turn each shaft the same number of turns.
  1. Release the parking brake and drive the machine forward again to check the squeegee blade deflection.
  2. Readjust the squeegee blade deflection if necessary.

REMOVING THE REAR SQUEEGEE ASSEMBLY

In short This procedure removes the rear squeegee from the machine. Lower the squeegee, power off and set the parking brake, take off the suction hose, loosen both mounting knobs and pull the squeegee off.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‍⁠‍​​​⁠‍⁠​‌‍‍‌‍‌⁠‌‌⁠⁠‌
  1. Lower the squeegee to approximately 25mm (1 in) from the floor.
  2. Turn the machine power off and set the parking brake.
  3. Remove the squeegee suction hose from the top of the rear squeegee.
Photo of a hand pulling the squeegee suction hose off the top of the rear squeegee, with a white arrow pointing up at the hose connection
  1. Loosen both squeegee mounting knobs.
Photo of the rear of the machine showing the rear squeegee, with two white arrows pointing up at the two squeegee mounting knobs
  1. Pull the squeegee off the machine.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 126, used with permission. SES ref PF-PYSQ-F4FO‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‍⁠‍​​​⁠‍⁠​‌‍‍‌‍‌⁠‌‌⁠⁠‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 126 of 154
MAINTENANCE

SIDE SQUEEGEE

In short The side squeegee has a single height adjustment made with the adjustment nuts and screws. Loosen the nuts, raise or lower the squeegee with the screws, then tighten the nuts again.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍⁠‌‌‍⁠​‌‌⁠‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌‌⁠‍‌​‍

ADJUSTING THE SIDE SQUEEGEE

The side squeegee has one adjustment; height. To change the height adjustment, loosen the adjustment nuts. Raise or lower the squeegee with the adjustment screws. Tighten the adjustment nuts. The factory setting is toward the lower end of the adjustment screw.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍⁠‌‌‍⁠​‌‌⁠‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌‌⁠‍‌​‍

Photo of the side squeegee mounting area with two large arrows pointing at the adjustment screws and springs on the side squeegee brackets

SQUEEGEE BLADES

In short The rear squeegee assembly channels water to the vacuum fan suction, and the side squeegees control water spray. Worn or damaged blades should be replaced.

The rear squeegee assembly channels water into the vacuum fan suction. The front blade channels the water, and the rear blade wipes the floor.

The side squeegees control water spray and channel water into the path of the rear squeegee.

Replace any worn or damaged squeegee blades.

REAR SQUEEGEE BLADES

Check the squeegee blades for damage and wear daily. Rotate or replace either of the squeegee blades if the leading edge is torn or worn half-way through the thickness of the blade.

The squeegee has two squeegee blades, the front and rear. Each blade has four wiping edges. To use them all, start with one wiping edge. To use the next wiping edge, rotate the blade end-for-end. To use the next wiping edge, rotate the top edges down, bottom edges up. To use the last edge, rotate the blade end-for-end.

Photo of the rear squeegee assembly with a large arrow pointing to the left along the squeegee blade

REPLACING OR ROTATING THE REAR SQUEEGEE BLADES

  1. Make sure the squeegee is raised off the floor.
  2. Turn the machine power off and set the parking brake.
FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, turn off machine.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 127, used with permission. SES ref PF-6VQ7-AGBV‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‌⁠⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍⁠‌‌‍⁠​‌‌⁠‌⁠‍⁠⁠‍‌‌⁠‍‌​‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 127 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Release the squeegee retainer strip clamp on the right hand side of the squeegee.
  2. Remove the squeegee retainer strip.
  3. Pull the squeegee blades off the squeegee frame.
  4. Replace or rotate the squeegee blades to allow a new edge to face the front of the machine.
  5. Mount the squeegees back onto the squeegee frame.
Two hands holding the squeegee frame at the rear of the machine near the right side, working at the retainer strip clamp on the squeegee
NOTE: Lubricating the squeegee frame where the squeegee makes contact will make it easier to install the squeegee blade.
  1. Mount the retainer strip back over the squeegee blades. Secure the retainer strip with the retainer strip clamp.
  2. Adjust the rear squeegee as described in LEVELING THE REAR SQUEEGEE and ADJUSTING REAR SQUEEGEE BLADE DEFLECTION.
One hand holding the squeegee frame while the other hand pulls a squeegee blade off the frame at the rear of the machine
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 128, used with permission. SES ref PF-HFUD-5OLX‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​​​​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠​​​​​⁠⁠​‍‍‍‌‍‌‍⁠⁠​‌​‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 128 of 154
MAINTENANCE

SIDE SQUEEGEES BLADES

In short The side squeegees control water spray and channel water into the path of the rear squeegee, and should be checked daily for damage and wear. Replace the blades when damaged or out of shape, after raising the scrub head, turning the machine off and setting the parking brake.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​​⁠‍‌​‌‍⁠​‌​‌‍‌

The side squeegees control water spray and channel water into the path of the rear squeegee. Check the side squeegees for damage and wear daily.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​​⁠‍‌​‌‍⁠​‌​‌‍‌

REPLACING THE SIDE SQUEEGEE BLADES

Replace the side squeegee blades whenever they become damaged or lose their shape or resiliency. Reverse the squeegee point guides from one side squeegee to the opposite side whenever they become worn, or replace when they become worn on both sides.

  1. Raise the scrub head.
  2. Turn the machine power off and set the parking brake.
FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine; stop on level surface, set parking brake, turn off machine and remove key.
  1. Remove the cotter pin, clevis pin, point guide, and the retainer bracket from the front of the side squeegee.
  2. Pull the squeegee blade off the front of the squeegee frame.
Photo of a person pulling the side squeegee blade off the front of the squeegee frame under the machine, with a white arrow pointing to the blade end
  1. Slide the new squeegee blade onto the frame.
NOTE: Lubricating the squeegee frame where the squeegee makes contact will make it easier to install the squeegee blade.
  1. Replace the retainer bracket, deflector, clevis pin, and cotter pin.
  2. Repeat for the side squeegee on the other side of the scrub head.
Photo of a person sliding the new side squeegee blade onto the frame, with a white arrow pointing left toward the blade and loose pins on the floor
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 129, used with permission. SES ref PF-QNCC-VPQQ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​​‌​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠​​​​‍⁠​​⁠‍‌​‌‍⁠​‌​‌‍‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 129 of 154
MAINTENANCE

BELTS AND CHAINS

In short This section covers the belts that drive the scrub brushes and the sweeping brushes. Check each belt for damage, wear and, where stated, adjustment after every 100 hours of operation, and keep to the belt tension given for each belt.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​​‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌⁠‌‌‍‍​‌‌‌‌‍⁠​​​​⁠‍‌⁠​

SCRUB BRUSH DRIVE BELTS

The two brush drive belts are located on the cylindrical brush scrub head. One belt is located on each side of the machine. The belts drive the cylindrical brushes. Proper belt tension should be a 4 mm (0.16 in) deflection from a force of 1.8 to 2.0 kg (4.2 to 4.6 lb) at the belt midpoint.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​​‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌⁠‌‌‍‍​‌‌‌‌‍⁠​​​​⁠‍‌⁠​

Check the belts for damage, wear and adjustment after every 100 hours of operation.

FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, avoid moving parts. Do not wear loose jackets, shirts, or sleeves when working on machine.
Photo of the cylindrical scrub head with its brush drive belt running over the drive pulley; a white arrow points to the belt

SWEEPING BRUSH DRIVE BELT

The sweeping brush drive belt is located on the left hand side of the sweeping assembly. The belts drives sheave that drives the main sweeping brush belt. Proper belt tension should be a 6 mm (0.25 in) deflection from a force of 0.9 kg (2 lb) at the belt midpoint.

Check the belts for damage, wear and adjustment after every 100 hours of operation.

FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, avoid moving parts. Do not wear loose jackets, shirts, or sleeves when working on machine.
Photo of the left hand side of the sweeping assembly showing the sweeping brush drive belt and sheaves; a white arrow points up to the belt

MAIN SWEEPING BRUSH BELT

The main sweeping brush belt is located on the left hand side of the sweeping assembly. The belt drives the main sweeping brush and the cylindrical conveyor. Proper belt tension is automatically kept by the idler pulley.

Check the belts for damage and wear after every 100 hours of operation.

FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, avoid moving parts. Do not wear loose jackets, shirts, or sleeves when working on machine.
Photo of the left hand side of the sweeping assembly with two white arrows pointing to the idler pulley and the main sweeping brush belt
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 130, used with permission. SES ref PF-ENT4-ZZGF‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​​‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌⁠‌‌‍‍​‌‌‌‌‍⁠​​​​⁠‍‌⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 130 of 154
MAINTENANCE

SWEEPING VACUUM FAN BELT

In short This part covers the belt that drives the sweeping vacuum fan, which sits under the top cover. Check it for damage and wear every 100 hours and keep its deflection within the stated range.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠‌⁠‌​‌‌‌‌‌‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍

The sweeping vacuum fan belt is located under the top cover, behind the sweeping vacuum fan. The belt drives the sweeping vacuum fan. Proper belt tension should be a 3 to 7 mm (0.125 to .25 in) deflection from a force of 2.3 kg (5 lb) at the belt midpoint.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠‌⁠‌​‌‌‌‌‌‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍

Check the belt for damage and wear after every 100 hours of operation.

WARNING: Moving belt and fan. Keep away.
Photo of the area under the top cover showing the sweeping vacuum fan belt, with a large white arrow pointing at the belt near the fan, and vacuum hoses on both sides

STEERING GEAR CHAIN

In short The steering gear chain tension is checked after the first 50 hours and then every 500 hours. Deflection between the steering and idler sprockets should be within the stated range.

The steering gear chain tension should be checked after the first 50 hours of operation and every 500 hours there after. The deflection should be 3 to 6 mm (0.12 to 0.25 in) between the steering sprocket and the idler sprocket when the steering wheel is turned the tightest position either direction.

FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, avoid moving parts. Do not wear loose jackets, shirts, or sleeves when working on machine.
Photo of the steering gear chain running over the steering sprocket, with a white arrow pointing at the chain

STATIC DRAG CHAIN

In short A static drag chain, attached to the transaxle, prevents static electricity from building up in the machine. It must always touch the floor.

A static drag chain prevents the buildup of static electricity in the machine. The chain is attached to the transaxle.

Make sure the chain is always touching the floor.

Photo of the static drag chain hanging down from the underside of the machine to the floor, with a white arrow pointing at the chain
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 131, used with permission. SES ref PF-OZEU-O3N4‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌⁠⁠‌⁠‌​‌‌‌‌‌‍‌⁠⁠‌⁠⁠⁠‍​⁠‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 131 of 154
MAINTENANCE

HOPPER LIFT DRIVE CHAIN

In short This section covers checking the tension of the hopper lift drive chain on the left side of the machine. Check it after the first 50 hours of operation and every 500 hours after that, with the hopper raised and in the dump position.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌‌⁠‌‌⁠‍​⁠⁠⁠‌⁠​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​

The hopper lift drive chain is located on the left hand side of the machine, close to the hopper. The chain tension should be checked after the first 50 hours of operation and every 500 hours there after.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌‌⁠‌‌⁠‍​⁠⁠⁠‌⁠​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​

Photo of the left side of the machine near the hopper, with a white arrow pointing to the hopper lift drive chain

Check the chain tension with the hopper raised and in the dump position. There should be no more than 1/8 deflection on the back side of the chain. Adjust the tension with the chain tension adjustment.

FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine, stop on level surface, set parking brake.
WARNING: Lift arm pinch point. Stay clear of hopper lift arms.
WARNING: Raised hopper may fall. Engage hopper support bar.

HOPPER TILT DRIVE CHAIN

In short This section covers checking the tension of the hopper tilt drive chain on the left side of the machine, alongside the hopper lift arm. The check interval and the deflection limit are the same as for the lift drive chain.

The hopper tilt drive chain is located on the left hand side of the machine, along side the hopper lift arm. The chain tension should be checked after the first 50 hours of operation and every 500 hours there after.

Photo of the left side of the machine alongside the hopper lift arm, with a white arrow pointing to the hopper tilt drive chain

Check the chain tension with the hopper raised and in the dump position. There should be no more than 1/8 deflection on the back side of the chain. Adjust the tension with the chain tension adjustment.

FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine, stop on level surface, set parking brake.
WARNING: Lift arm pinch point. Stay clear of hopper lift arms.
WARNING: Raised hopper may fall. Engage hopper support bar.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 132, used with permission. SES ref PF-OGFI-R7PW‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌‌⁠‌‌⁠‍​⁠⁠⁠‌⁠​⁠⁠⁠⁠‌⁠⁠​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 132 of 154
MAINTENANCE

SKIRTS AND SEALS

In short This section covers the front flap skirt, the recirculation skirts and the side skirts of the sweeper. Check each one for damage or wear after every 50 hours of operation, and keep the front flap and side skirts just touching the floor.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠​​‍‍‍⁠‌⁠‍‍‌⁠​​​​​​‌‍​

FRONT FLAP SKIRT

The front flap is located in front of the sweeping assembly. The flap can be raised and lowered by the front flap lever, allowing large debris to be trapped and swept up into the hopper. Check the front flap skirt after every 50 hours of operation for damage or wear. The front flap skirt should be just touching the floor, or 4 mm (0.188 in) off the floor in dusty sweeping conditions.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠​​‍‍‍⁠‌⁠‍‍‌⁠​​​​​​‌‍​

Photo of the front of the sweeping assembly with the sweeping brush above and the front flap skirt along the bottom; a white arrow points up at the front flap skirt

RECIRCULATION SKIRTS

The recirculation skirts are located behind the main sweeping brush. Inspect the recirculation skirts for damage and wear after every 50 hours of operation.

Photo of the area behind the main sweeping brush; a white arrow points up at the recirculation skirt

SIDE SKIRTS

The side skirts help direct debris into the debris hopper. The side skirts are located on both sides of the main sweeping brush. The side skirts should be just touching the floor. Check the skirts after every 50 hours of operation for damage or wear.

Photo of the side of the main sweeping brush with belts and pulleys above; a white arrow points up at the side skirt
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 133, used with permission. SES ref PF-PX43-WBTE‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠⁠​​‍‍‍⁠‌⁠‍‍‌⁠​​​​​​‌‍​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 133 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

SCRUB HEAD FLOOR SKIRTS

In short The floor skirts sit at the front and rear of the disc brush scrub heads. Inspect them for damage and wear every 50 hours, and make sure they clear the floor by 0 to 6 mm (0 to 0.25 in) when the brushes are new and the head is down.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‍‌‌‌‌‌‍⁠​⁠​‍​​​‌‌​‍‍‍​

The skirts are located in front and rear of the disc brush scrub heads. Check the skirts for damage and wear every 50 hours of operation.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‍‌‌‌‌‌‍⁠​⁠​‍​​​‌‌​‍‍‍​

The skirts should clear the floor by 0 to 6 mm (0 to 0.25 in) when the scrub brushes are new, and the scrub head is down.

Scrub head seen from the front with a large arrow pointing to the rubber floor skirt along the lower edge of the disc brush scrub head

TOP COVER SEALS

In short The top cover seals run around the edge of the top cover, between the front hopper and the side door. Check them for wear or damage every 100 hours.

The top cover seals are located around the edge of the top cover, between the front hopper, and the side door.

Check the seals for wear or damage every 100 hours of operation.

Open top cover with two arrows pointing to the seals along the edge of the top cover and the side door area

SIDE COVER SEAL

In short The side cover seal is on the edge of the side cover door. Check it for wear or damage every 100 hours.

The side cover seal is located on the edge of the side cover door.

Check the seal for wear or damage every 100 hours of operation.

Side cover door with an arrow pointing to the dark seal along the door's vertical edge
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 134, used with permission. SES ref PF-2ZRP-JOP7‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠‍‌‌‌‌‌‍⁠​⁠​‍​​​‌‌​‍‍‍​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 134 of 154
MAINTENANCE

HOPPER FILTER SEALS

In short This part covers three sets of seals around the hopper: the hopper filter seals, the hopper vacuum fan seal and the hopper seals. Each one should be checked for damage and wear after every 100 hours of operation.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‌⁠⁠‌‌⁠‍⁠‍‌​‍‌‍​​⁠⁠‍⁠‍​​

The hopper filter seals are located around the outer edge, on both sides of the hopper filter. The hopper filter seals seal the hopper filter in between the hopper baffle plate and the hopper filter cover when the hopper filter cover is latched down in the proper operating position.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‌⁠⁠‌‌⁠‍⁠‍‌​‍‌‍​​⁠⁠‍⁠‍​​

Check the seals for damage and wear after every 100 hours of operation.

Photo of the hopper filter in its housing, with a white arrow pointing to the hopper filter seal along the lower right edge of the filter

HOPPER VACUUM FAN SEAL

The vacuum fan seal is located between the hopper cover and vacuum fan inlet.

Check the seal for damage and wear after every 100 hours of operation.

Photo of the vacuum fan inlet under the hopper cover, with a white arrow pointing to the vacuum fan seal, and the hopper filter visible at the lower left

HOPPER SEALS

The hopper seals are located on the bottom side of the machine frame that contact the top edge of the hopper.

Check the seals for damage and wear after every 100 hours of operation.

Photo of the underside of the machine frame above the hopper, with a white arrow pointing up at the hopper seal along the frame's bottom edge
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 135, used with permission. SES ref PF-FWAX-GJOB‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‌⁠⁠‌‌⁠‍⁠‍‌​‍‌‍​​⁠⁠‍⁠‍​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 135 of 154
MAINTENANCE

SOLUTION TANK COVER SEAL

In short The solution tank cover seal sits under the solution tank cover. Check it for wear or damage every 100 hours of operation.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‍​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌​‍​‌​​‌⁠‌‍​‌‍​⁠‌‌​‍​​

The solution tank cover seal is located under the solution tank cover.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‍​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌​‍​‌​​‌⁠‌‍​‌‍​⁠‌‌​‍​​

Check the seal for wear or damage every 100 hours of operation.

Photo of the solution tank cover raised, with a large white arrow pointing to the dark seal around the edge of the cover

RECOVERY TANK COVER SEAL

In short The recovery tank cover seal sits under the recovery tank cover. Check it for wear or damage every 100 hours of operation.

The recovery tank cover seal is located under the recovery tank cover.

Check the seal for wear or damage every 100 hours of operation.

Photo of the recovery tank cover raised, with a large white arrow pointing to the dark seal around the tank opening
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 136, used with permission. SES ref PF-H4WI-RXG3‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‍​​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‌​‍​‌​​‌⁠‌‍​‌‍​⁠‌‌​‍​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 136 of 154
MAINTENANCE

BRAKES AND TIRES

In short This section covers checking and adjusting the brakes, checking the tires, and tightening the front wheel nuts. Check the brake adjustment and the tires every 100 hours, and torque the front wheel nuts after the first 50 hours and every 500 hours.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​​​⁠⁠⁠‍⁠​⁠‍⁠​​‌‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠​‍​​

BRAKES

The foot brake and the parking brake operate the linkage that controls the brakes on the rear wheels.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​​​⁠⁠⁠‍⁠​⁠‍⁠​​‌‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠​‍​​

The foot pedal should not travel more than 25 mm (1 in) to engage the brake. Check the brake adjustment after every 100 hours of operation.

Park the machine on a level surface. Turn the machine power off, and block the machine tires.

Photo of the operator's foot area with a white arrow pointing at the brake pedal next to the accelerator pedal

Loosen the adjustment nuts. Adjust the brake cable with one nut and lock in place with the other nut.

Adjust the brake cable so that the brake pedal travels no more than 25 mm (1 in) to fully engage the brakes. Readjust the brake cable if necessary.

Remove the blocks from the machine tires.

Photo of the brake cable and adjustment nuts near the chain and sprocket, with a white arrow pointing at the cable end

TIRES

All the machine tires are solid. Check the tires for damage and wear every 100 hours of operations.

FRONT WHEEL

Torque the front wheel nuts twice in the pattern shown to 122 to 155 Nm (87−111 ft. lbs) after the first 50 hours of operation, and every 500 hours of operation.

Front wheel with five lug nuts numbered 1 to 5 showing the order for tightening the nuts in a star pattern
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 137, used with permission. SES ref PF-CAFS-2GGS‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​​​⁠⁠⁠‍⁠​⁠‍⁠​​‌‍⁠‌⁠⁠⁠​‍​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 137 of 154
MAINTENANCE

PUSHING, TOWING, AND TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

In short A disabled machine may be pushed from the front or rear, or towed from the front, only for a very short distance at no more than 3.2 kp/h (2 mph). To transport it, empty the tanks, then use a winch to load it unless the loading surface is horizontal and 380 mm (15 in) or less from the ground.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠​​‌​‌​‌‌‌⁠​​⁠‍‍⁠

PUSHING OR TOWING THE MACHINE

If the machine becomes disabled, it can be pushed from the front or rear, but only tow it from the front.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠​​‌​‌​‌‌‌⁠​​⁠‍‍⁠

Only push or tow the machine for a very short distance and do not exceed 3.2 kp/h (2 mph). It is NOT intended to be pushed or towed for a long distance or at a high speed.

ATTENTION! Do not push or tow machine for a long distance or damage may occur to the propelling system.

TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

  1. Position the front of the machine at the loading edge of the truck or trailer.
    FOR SAFETY: Use a truck or trailer that will support the weight of the machine.

NOTE: Empty the recovery and solution tanks before transporting the machine.

  1. If the loading surface is not horizontal or is higher than 380 mm (15 in) from the ground, use a winch to load machine.

    If the loading surface is horizontal AND is 380 mm (15 in) or less from the ground, the machine may be driven onto the truck or trailer.
Photo of a machine being loaded onto a truck or trailer bed beside a building wall, with two white lines marking the loading surface and two arrows pointing toward it from above and below to show its height from the ground
  1. To winch the machine onto the truck or trailer, attach the winching chains to the front tie down locations. The front tie-down locations are on the front sides of the machine. Make sure the machine is centered.
    FOR SAFETY: When loading machine onto truck or trailer, use winch. Do not drive the machine onto the truck or trailer unless the loading surface is horizontal AND is 380 mm (15 in) or less from the ground.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 138, used with permission. SES ref PF-GJW3-LUGD‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌‌‌⁠⁠⁠​​‌​‌​‌‌‌⁠​​⁠‍‍⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 138 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

  1. Position the machine onto the truck or trailer as far as possible. If the machine starts to veer off the centerline of the truck or trailer, stop and turn the steering wheel to center the machine.
  2. Set the parking brake, lower the scrub head and block the machine tires. Tie down the machine to the truck or trailer before transporting.

    The front tie-down locations are on the front sides of the machine.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‌‌⁠​‌‌‍⁠‍‍​‍‍‍‍⁠‍⁠‌‌

    Photo of the front side of the machine with a white arrow pointing to the front tie-down location opening

    The rear tie-down locations are on the rear corners of the machine.

    Photo of a rear corner of the machine near the rear wheel with a white arrow pointing down at the rear tie-down location
  3. If the loading surface is not horizontal or is higher than 380 mm (15 in) from the ground, use a winch to unload machine.

    If the loading surface is horizontal AND is 380 mm (15 in) or less from the ground, the machine may be driven off the truck or trailer.

FOR SAFETY: When unloading machine off truck or trailer, use winch. Do not drive the machine off the truck or trailer unless the loading surface is horizontal AND 380 mm (15 in) or less from the ground.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 139, used with permission. SES ref PF-PJTY-VIRN‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​‍⁠​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​‍‌‌⁠​‌‌‍⁠‍‍​‍‍‍‍⁠‍⁠‌‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 139 of 154
MAINTENANCE

MACHINE JACKING

In short This section explains where and how to jack up the machine for service. Stop on a flat, level surface, block the tires, and use a jack that supports the machine's weight at the designated front and rear locations only.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌​⁠‌⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠​‍⁠​‌‌‌‌​​​‌‌

You can jack up the machine for service at the designated locations. Use a jack that will support the weight of the machine. Always stop the machine on a flat, level surface and block the tires before jacking up the machine.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌​⁠‌⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠​‍⁠​‌‌‌‌​​​‌‌

The front jacking locations are located on both sides of the machine, behind the sweeping assembly.

FOR SAFETY: Before leaving or servicing machine, stop on level surface, set parking brake.
FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, use a hoist or jack that will support the weight of the machine.
Photo of the lower side of the machine behind the sweeping assembly, with a white arrow pointing left at the front jacking location label on the frame

The rear jacking locations are located on the rear bumper, behind the rear tires.

FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, block machine tires before jacking machine up.
FOR SAFETY: When servicing machine, jack machine up at designated locations only. Block machine up with jack stands.
Photo of the rear bumper below the Tennant logo, with two white arrows pointing up at the rear jacking locations marked with labels on the bumper
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 140, used with permission. SES ref PF-P5FR-P5YY‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​⁠​​​​‌​⁠​​‌‍‌​⁠‌⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠​‍⁠​‌‌‌‌​​​‌‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 140 of 154
MAINTENANCE

STORAGE INFORMATION

In short This section lists the steps to take before storing the machine for a long period: drain and clean the tanks, raise the rear squeegee and scrub head, park in a cool, dry area, and deal with the batteries. A separate freeze protection procedure uses antifreeze in the solution tank.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠​‌​⁠⁠‍​​‍⁠‌⁠‌⁠​‍​‌​⁠​​

The following steps should be taken when storing the machine for extended periods of time.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠​‌​⁠⁠‍​​‍⁠‌⁠‌⁠​‍​‌​⁠​​

  1. Drain and clean the solution and recovery tanks.

    ES™ machines: Run clean water through the solution system and the ES™ solution pump.
  2. Raise the rear squeegee and the scrub head.
  3. Park the machine in a cool, dry area.
  4. Remove the batteries, or charge them after every three months.
NOTE: Storing or transporting machines equipped with the ES or the FaST system in freezing temperatures requires special procedures. Consult a TENNANT representative for more information.

FREEZE PROTECTION (MACHINES WITHOUT OPTIONAL ec–H2O SYSTEM)

  1. Drain the solution tank and recovery tank of all water.
  2. Pour 6 gallons (3.8 liters) of Propylene Glycol Based / Recreational Vehicle (RV) Antifreeze into the solution tank at full strength. Do not dilute.
  3. Turn the machine power on and operate the solution flow system. Turn the machine off when the antifreeze appears at the scrub head.

    If the machine is equipped power wand option, operate the the wand for a few seconds to protect the pump.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 141, used with permission. SES ref PF-HOBU-SJH3‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​⁠‌​​​‌​⁠​​‍⁠​‌​⁠⁠‍​​‍⁠‌⁠‌⁠​‍​‌​⁠​​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 141 of 154
MAINTENANCE

FREEZE PROTECTING THE ec−H2O SYSTEM

In short This procedure protects the ec-H2O system from freezing. You empty both tanks, run out the remaining solution, then cycle RV antifreeze through the system with the flush switch until it appears at the scrub head.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠​‍‌‍​‍⁠​‍‌​​​⁠‍⁠​‍⁠‌​‌
  1. Completely empty the solution tank and recovery tank.
  2. Start the machine and run all remaining solution from the solution system. Run the solution system until solution no longer appears at the scrub head.
  3. Remove the siphon hose from the retainer.
A hand pulling the siphon hose out of its retainer on the ec-H2O module bracket, with a white arrow pointing down at the hose
  1. Disconnect the ec−H2O system intake hose from the solution supply hose.
  2. Connect the siphon hose to the ec−H2O system intake hose and place the siphon hose into container containing 2 gallons (7.6 liters) of Propylene Glycol Based / Recreational Vehicle (RV) Antifreeze.
View of the ec-H2O plumbing in the machine with the pump and hoses; a white arrow points to the intake hose connection to the solution supply hose
  1. Press and release the flush switch on the ec−H2O module to cycle the RV antifreeze through ec−H2O system. When the antifreeze appears at the scrub head, press the switch again to turn off the module.
  2. Disconnect the siphon hose from the ec−H2O system intake hose.
  3. Reconnect ec−H20 intake hose to the solution supply hose.
The ec-H2O module mounted on a gray bracket, with a white arrow pointing to the flush switch at its top
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 142, used with permission. SES ref PF-Q6GJ-UD4K‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​⁠‍​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠​‍‌‍​‍⁠​‍‌​​​⁠‍⁠​‍⁠‌​‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 142 of 154
MAINTENANCE
  1. Reconnect the siphon hose to the retainer and neatly coil the hose for storage.
IMPORTANT: Before operating the machine, the antifreeze must be flushed from the module. See FLUSHING ANTIFREEZE FROM ec−H2O MODULE section of this manual.
  1. If machine is equipped power wand option, operate the the wand for a few seconds to protect the pump.
Photo of the ec-H2O module area inside the machine, showing a gray mounting panel with a black module box, hoses and wiring, and a white arrow pointing to a fitting on the panel
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 143, used with permission. SES ref PF-AUYB-WCNP‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍​⁠⁠​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‍‍‌‌​⁠⁠‍‍‍​‍‌‌‍‍‌‍​‌​‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 143 of 154
MAINTENANCE

FLUSHING ANTIFREEZE FROM THE ec−H2O MODULE

In short This procedure flushes antifreeze out of the ec−H2O system using a container of clean water. You connect the siphon hose, run the module until the water turns clear, then stop the flush cycle.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‍​​‌⁠​⁠​⁠‌​​⁠⁠⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‌‌⁠
  1. Remove the siphon hose from the retainer.
Hand pulling the siphon hose out of its retainer on the gray ec-H2O module bracket, with a large white arrow pointing down at the retainer
  1. Disconnect the ec−H2O system intake hose from the solution supply hose.
  2. Connect the siphon hose to the ec−H2O system intake hose and place the siphon hose into container containing 2 gallons (7.6 liters) of clean water.
View of the ec-H2O plumbing in the machine with clear hoses and fittings; a white arrow points down to the connection between the system intake hose and the solution supply hose
  1. Press and release the ec−H2O module switch to flush the antifreeze from the ec−H2O system.

    When the water turns clear, press the module switch again to stop the flush cycle.

Dispose the antifreeze in an environmentally safe way according to local waste disposal regulations.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‍​​‌⁠​⁠​⁠‌​​⁠⁠⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‌‌⁠

The ec-H2O module on its gray bracket with a white arrow pointing left at the module switch
  1. The machine is now ready for scrubbing.
ATTENTION: If the antifreeze is not properly flushed from the ec−H2O system, the ec−H2O module may detect an error and not function (ec−H2O indicator light will turn red). If this occurs, reset key and repeat the flush procedure.
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 144, used with permission. SES ref PF-35JU-EBEE‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌​​​​​‌​⁠​​​‍​​‌⁠​⁠​⁠‌​​⁠⁠⁠⁠‍⁠‌‍‌‌⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 144 of 154
SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL MACHINE DIMENSIONS/CAPACITIES

In short This section lists the machine's physical dimensions, tank and hopper capacities, weight rating and vibration levels. It also gives brush and squeegee sizes for the Max Pro 1000 and Max Pro 1200, and the FaST system pump and flow figures.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌​‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠‌‍‌‍‍‌‍‍‌​​​‍⁠⁠
ItemDimension/capacity
Length2641 mm (104 in)
Width, frame (with dual side brushes)1220 mm (48.5 in)
Height, standard1450 mm (57 in)
Height with overhead guard option2070 mm (81.5 in)
Cylindrical brush diameter229 mm (9 in)
Sweeping path width, single side brush (RH)1270 mm (50 in)
Sweeping path width, dual side brushes1625 mm (64 in)
Hopper weight capacity135 kg (300 lbs)
Hopper volume capacity84.6 L (3 ft3)
Dust filter area4.8m2 (52.5 ft2)
Solution tank capacity216 L (57 gal)
Recovery tank capacity216 L (57 gal)
Tank capacity with ES option340 L (90 gal)
Propelling gear box 90 wt. gear lubricant capacity2.7 L (2.7 qt)
Ceiling height minimum dumping clearance1525 mm (60 in)
GVWR2060 kg (4580 lb)
Vibration level at steering wheel does not exceed2.5 m/s2
Vibration level at operator seat does not exceed0.5 m/s2
ItemMax Pro 1000Max Pro 1200
Disc brush diameter510 mm (20 in)406 mm (16 in)
Cylindrical brush length978 mm (38.5 in)1180 mm (46.5 in)
Rear Squeegee width1300 mm (51 in)1510 mm (59.5 in)
Scrubbing path width1020 mm (40 in)1220 mm (48 in)

FaST SYSTEM

ItemMeasure
Solution pump36 Volt DC, 5A, 5.7 LPM (1.5 GPM) open flow, 45 psi bypass setting
Low solution flow rate2.08 LPM (0.55 GPM)
High solution flow rate4.16 LPM (1.1 GPM)
Detergent pump36 Volt DC
Low concentrate flow rate2.14 CC/Minute (0.07 Liquid Ounces/Minute)
High concentrate flow rate4.28 CC/Minute (0.14 Liquid Ounces/Minute)
Air pump36 Volt DC, 0.6 Maximum Amp draw
Air pump flow rate8.7 LPM (0.3 CFM) open flow
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 145, used with permission. SES ref PF-LWKS-64QZ‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌​‌​​​‌​⁠​​⁠⁠‌‍‌⁠‍⁠⁠‌‍‌‍‍‌‍‍‌​​​‍⁠⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 145 of 154
SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL MACHINE PERFORMANCE

In short This section lists the machine's rated performance figures, including speeds, turning radii and the maximum climb angle. It also lists the power types: batteries, electric motors and chargers.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌​‍​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠⁠​‌‌‍‌⁠‍⁠‌‍‌​‍⁠‌​‌​​⁠‍

Batteries and chargers: make sure your charger is compatible with your batteries, and set its charging algorithm to your battery pack before you use it.

ItemMeasure
Maximum forward speed7.2 km/h (4.5 mph)
Maximum reverse speed4.8 km (3mph)
Minimum turning radius, left4547 mm (179 in)
Minimum turning radius, right4648 mm (183 in)
Minimum aisle turn2946 mm (116 in)
Maximum rated climb and descent angle with full tanks6°
Maximum rated climb and descent angle with empty tanks8°

POWER TYPE

TypeQuantityVoltsAh RatingWeight
Batteries, Dry136500 @ 6 hr rate617 kg (1370 lb)
136750 @ 6 hr rate893 kg (1984 lb)
Batteries, Sealed136600 @ 6 hr rate810 kg (1800 lb)
Batteries, Wet136380 @ 6 hr rate436 kg (960 lb)
136500 @ 6 hr rate617 kg (1370 lb)
136750 @ 6 hr rate893 kg (1984 lb)
TypeUseVDCKw (hp)
Electric MotorsSweep brush360.60 (.8)
Scrub brush360.75 (1)
Heavy Duty scrub brush361.12 (1.5)
Vacuum fan360.63 (0.85)
Propelling363.4 (4.6)
TypeVDCampHzPhaseVAC
Chargers3675601208−240−480
3675603208−240−480
36120601208−240−480
36120603208−240−480
36150601208−240−480
36150603208−240−480
3693601208−240−480
3693603208−240−480
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 146, used with permission. SES ref PF-5EO2-DO6A‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌​‍​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠⁠​‌‌‍‌⁠‍⁠‌‍‌​‍⁠‌​‌​​⁠‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 146 of 154
SPECIFICATIONS

STEERING

TypePower sourceEmergency steering
Front wheel, hydraulic and rotary valve controlledHydraulicManual

HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS

SystemCapacityFluid Type
Hydraulic reservoir1.9L (0.5 gal)ISO Grade 32 − below 7° C (45° F)
Hydraulic total2.6L (0.65 gal)

BRAKING SYSTEM

TypeOperation
Service brakesMechanical drum brakes (2), one per rear wheel, cable actuated
Parking brakeUtilizes service brakes, cable actuated

TIRES

LocationTypeSize
Front (1)Solid413 X 152 mm (16.25 x 6 in)
Rear (2)Solid406 X 127 mm (16 x 5 in)

ec−H20 SYSTEM

ItemMeasure
Solution pump36 Volt DC, 5A, 5.7 LPM (1.5 GPM) open flow, 45 psi bypass setting
Solution flow rate1.67 LPM (0.44 GPM) − Low (optional)*
2.35 LPM (0.62 GPM) − Low (standard)
3.18 LPM (0.84 GPM) − Low (optional)*
3.80 LPM (1.00 GPM) − High (standard)

*If the optional solution flow rates are required, contact an Authorized Service Center.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‍‌‌​​⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌⁠‌‌‍⁠⁠‍‍‌​

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 147, used with permission. SES ref PF-2B5V-6H2A‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌​⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‍‌‌​​⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠⁠​⁠‌⁠‌‌‍⁠⁠‍‍‌​
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 147 of 154
SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

In short This page gives the overall machine dimensions in top, side and front views. Sizes are shown in millimeters with inches in parentheses, and the MaxPro 1000 and MaxPro 1200 widths differ.‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‌​​​​‌​⁠​​‌​​⁠‌‌⁠‍​​‌​‌‍‌⁠‍‍‍​​‌‍‌

MACHINE DIMENSIONS

Line drawings of the machine in top, side and front views with dimension arrows: 2641 mm (104 in) overall length, MaxPro 1000 at 1300 mm (51 in) and MaxPro 1200 at 1510 mm (59.5 in), 1231 mm (48.5 in) width, and heights of 2070 mm (81.5 in) and 1450 mm (57 in) on the side view
MACHINE DIMENSIONS (353382)
ViewDimension
Top view, length2641 mm (104 in)
Top view, MaxPro™ 10001300 mm (51 in)
Top view, MaxPro™ 12001510 mm (59.5 in)
Top view, width1231 mm (48.5 in)
Side view, overall height2070 mm (81.5 in)
Side view, height1450 mm (57 in)
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 148, used with permission. SES ref PF-SL2Q-5EG3‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‌​​​​‌​⁠​​‌​​⁠‌‌⁠‍​​‌​‌‍‌⁠‍‍‍​​‌‍‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 148 of 154
INDEX

INDEX

A

Adjusting rear squeegee blade deflection, 123‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‍‌​⁠​‍​‍​‌⁠‌‍⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‍​‍⁠

Adjusting the side squeegee, 125

Adjustments, Service brakes, 135

Aisle turn, 145

Ajustments, Steering gear chain, 129

B

Batteries, 91 - 94

  • Charger specifications, 145
  • Charging, 92 − 94
  • Discharge indicator, 19
  • Maintenance, 91
  • Specifications, 145

Battery, Fluid level, 42, 68

Battery discharge indicator, 19

Bearings

  • Front wheel support, 85
  • Rear wheel, 87

Belts, Brush drive, 128

Belts and chains, 128

  • Main sweeping brush belt, 128
  • Sweeping brush drive belt, 128
  • Sweeping vacuum fan belt, 129

Brake pedal, 12

Brakes, 42, 68, 135

Brakes and Tires, 135

Braking system, Specifications, 146

Brush, 68

Brush drive belts, 128

Brush pressure adjustment, scrubbing, 21

Brushes

  • information, recommendations, 49
  • main brush information, 102
  • main sweeping brush replacement, 102
  • Maintenance, 42, 68
  • Scrubbing, 50
    • Drive belts, 128
  • side sweeping brush replacement, 107

Button, Horn, 14

C

Capacities, 144

Chain

  • Drive, 88, 130
  • Steering gear, 88

Chains

  • Static drag, 129
  • Steering gear, 129

Changing message display language, 18

Checking and adjusting the main sweeping brush pattern, 103

Circuit breakers, 32

Control panel, 21

  • Battery discharge indicator, 19
  • Changing message display language, 18
  • detergent pump switch (option), 28
  • Display clock, 20
  • display clock setting & adjusting, 20
  • Edge scrub switch, 23
  • ES switch, 22
  • Filter shaker switch, 25
  • functions, 17
  • Hopper dump switch, 27
  • Hopper lower switch, 26
  • Hopper raise switch, 26
  • Hopper retract switch, 27
  • Hopper Temperature Indicator, 26
  • Hourmeter, 19
  • maintenance mode, 29, 31
  • Rear squeegee switch, 23
  • Recovery tank full indicator, 22, 26
  • Self , 94
  • Side brush switch, 24
  • Sweep switch, 24
  • Vacuum fan switch, 25

Controls, 11

  • Battery discharge indicator, 19
  • Brake pedal, 12
  • Circuit breakers, 32
  • Directional pedal, 12
  • ec−H20 switch (option), 17
  • Edge scrub, 23
  • ES switch, 22
  • FaST switch (option), 16
  • Filter shaker switch, 25
  • Horn button, 14
  • Hourmeter, 19
  • On , 14
  • Operating lights switch, 15
  • Parking brake pedal, 12
  • Power kill switch, 15
  • Power wand switch, 15
  • Rear squeegee switch, 23
  • Recovery tank full indicator, 22, 26
  • Scrub switch, 21
  • Side brush, 24
  • Side brush adjustment knob, 36
  • Solution flow lever, 16
  • Steering wheel, 13
  • Steering wheel column tilt lever, 16
  • Sweep switch, 24
  • Vacuum fan, 25
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 149, used with permission. SES ref PF-NMGX-NOAM‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‌‌​​​‌​⁠​​​⁠‍‌​⁠​‍​‍​‌⁠‌‍⁠⁠⁠⁠‍‍​‍⁠
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 149 of 154
INDEX

INDEX

Conveyor, Cylindrical, 105‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​‌⁠‌​⁠⁠⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍⁠​‌‌‌‌​‍​‌

Cylindrical brushes

  • Checking and adjusting brush pattern, 111 − 113
  • Replacing brushes, 114

Cylindrical conveyor, 105

  • Replacement, 105

D

Debris tray, Clean, 42, 68

Detergent pump switch (option), 28

Dimensions, 144

Directional pedal, 12

Display clock, 20

  • setting & adjusting, 20

Double scrubbing, 61

Draining and cleaning the tanks, 62 − 64

Drive chain, 88, 130

Dust filter cleaning, 97

Dust filter removal, 98

E

ec−H20 module flush procedure, 120

  • System, 120

ec−H20 Scrubbing System, Indicator Light Codes, 58

ec−H20 Scrubbing System Indicator Light Codes , 58

ec−H20 switch, 17

ec−H20 System, 41

Edge scrub switch, 23

Electric motors, 96, 145

Electrical

  • Batteries, 91 − 94
  • Charging batteries, 92 − 94
  • Circuit breakers, 32

Electrical system, fuses, 34

Electronics, Propelling circuit, 96

ES

  • Auto, 48
  • Clean tanks, 42, 68
  • Detergent level, 42, 68

ES switch, 22

ES system (option), filling the tanks, 46 − 48

F

FaST, System, 118

FaST pak agent, Installing, 43 − 45

FaST pak agent installation, 43 − 45

FaST Supply Hose Connector, 118

FaST switch, 16

FaST System, 40, 118

  • FaST supply hose connector, 118

FaST System Air Pump Filter, 118, 119

FaST System Filter Screen, 118

Filling the tanks, 46 − 48

Filter

  • FaST System Air Pump Filter, 118, 119
  • FaST System Filter Screen, 118
  • Vacuum fan inlet, 42, 68

Filter shaker switch, 25

Filter, dust, cleaning, 97

Filter, dust, removal, 98

Flush antifreeze from ec−H20 module, 142

Freeze protection, 139

Freeze protection, ec−H20 system, 140

Front flap lever, 36

Front wheel

  • Support bearing, 85
  • Torque, 135

Front wheel support bearing, 85

Fuses, 34

H

Hopper

  • dust filter cleaning, 97
  • dust filter removal, 98
  • filter seal, 133
  • seals, 133
  • Thermo, 101
  • vacuum fan seal, 133

Hopper dump switch, 27

Hopper lift arms, 87, 88, 130

Hopper lower switch, 26

Hopper raise switch, 26

Hopper retract switch, 27

Hopper support bar, 36

Hopper Temperature Indicator − Thermo Sentry, 26

Horn button, 14

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 150, used with permission. SES ref PF-7C23-KHRD‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‌‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠​‌⁠‌​⁠⁠⁠‌⁠‍⁠‍⁠​‌‌‌‌​‍​‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 150 of 154
INDEX

INDEX

Hoses‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠⁠‍‍​​‌‍⁠​‍‌⁠⁠‍⁠‍​⁠‍​‌

  • Hydraulic hoses, 90
  • Recovery tank drain, 35
  • Solution tank drain, 35

Hourmeter, 19

How the machine works, 39

Hydraulics

  • Fluid level, 42, 68
  • Hydraulic fluid, 90
  • Hydraulic fluid reservoir, 89
  • Hydraulic hoses, 90
  • Specifications, 146

Hydraulics , 89

I

Indicator Light Codes, ec-H20 Scrubbing System, 58

Indicators

  • Hopper Temperature, 26
  • Recovery tank full, 22, 26
  • Scrub brush pressure, 21

J

Jack points, 138

Jacking, 138

K

Knobs, Side brush adjustment, 36

L

Leveling the rear squeegee, 122

Levers

  • Front flap, 36
  • Solution flow, 16
  • Steering wheel column tilt, 16

Lubrication, 85

  • Drive chain, 88, 130
  • Front wheel support bearing, 85
  • hopper lift arms, 87, 88, 130
  • Propelling gearbox, 85
  • Rear wheel bearings, 87
  • Scrub head drag link arms, 86
  • Steering gear chain, 88

M

Machine, Jacking, 138

Machine components, 8

Machine dimensions, 147

Machine tie down location, 137

Main brush

  • information, 102
  • sweeping brush replacement, 102

Main sweeping brush, Adjusting brush pattern, 103

Maintenance, 82 - 106

  • Checking and adjusting brush pattern, 111 − 113
  • Cylindrical brushes, 111
  • Disk brushes, 109 − 114
  • Intervals, 82
  • Recommended, 7
  • Replacing cylindrical brushes, 114
  • Replacing disk brushes, 109
  • Scrub brushes, 109 − 114

Maintenance chart, 82

Maintenance mode

  • definition, 29
  • disabling, 31
  • resetting timers, 29

Motors, Electric, 96, 145

O

OnĆ, 14

Operating lights switch, 15

Operation, 7 - 56

  • disengaging hopper support bar, 55
  • emptying the hopper, 52
  • engaging hopper support bar, 54
  • stop sweeping, 51
  • sweeping, 51

Operation on inclines, 69

Operations

  • control panel functions, 17
  • stop scrubbing, 61 − 63

Operator Responsibility, 7

Operator seat, 37

  • suspension (option), 37

Options, 69 - 77

  • ES switch, 22
  • Positive solution control drain, 35
  • Power wand, 73 − 80
  • Power wand switch, 15
  • Vacuum wand, 69 − 73
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 151, used with permission. SES ref PF-ATUF-CEAW‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‌⁠​​​‌​⁠​​‌‌⁠⁠‍‍​​‌‍⁠​‍‌⁠⁠‍⁠‍​⁠‍​‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 151 of 154
INDEX

INDEX

P

Parking brake pedal, 12
Pedal, Directional, 12‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‍​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌⁠‌‌‍⁠⁠⁠‍‌‌⁠‍‍⁠​‍‍‌‍‍⁠‍

Pedals

  • Brake, 12
  • Parking brake, 12

Positive solution control drain, 35
PostĆ, 68
Power kill switch, 15
Power wand, 73 - 80
Power wand switch, 15
PreĆ, 42
Propelling circuit, 96
Propelling gearbox, 85
Pushing machine, 136
Pushing or towing the machine, 136
Pushing, towing, and transporting machine, 136

R

Rated incline and descent, 145

Rear squeegee, 122

  • Adjusting deflection, 123
  • Leveling, 122

Rear squeegee assembly, Removal, 124
Rear squeegee blades, 125
Rear squeegee switch, 23
Rear wheel bearings, 87
Recirculation skirts, 131
Recoevery tank, Drain and clean, 42, 68

Recovery tank, 116

  • Drain hose, 35
  • Draining and cleaning, 62 − 64
  • Positive solution control drain, 35
  • Tank full indicator, 22, 26

Recovery tank cover seal, 134
Recovery tank drain hose, 35
Replacing disk brushes, 109
Replacing rear squeegee blades, 125
Replacing side squeegee blades, 127
Rotating rear squeegee blades, 125

S

Safety

  • Labels, 5
  • Precautions, 3

Screen, FaST System Filter Screen, 118
Scrub brush pressure adjustment, 21

Scrub brushes, 109 - 114

  • Adjusting cylindrical brush pattern, 111 − 113
  • Brush pressure, 21
  • Checking cylindrical brush pattern, 111 − 113
  • Cylindrical brushes, 111
  • Disk brushes, 109
  • Replacing cylindrical brushes, 114
  • Replacing disk brushes, 109

Scrub functions, stop scrubbing, 61 - 63

Scrub head, 108 - 114

  • Adjustments, 108
  • Drag link arms, 86
  • Floor skirts, 132
  • Gas spring, 108

Scrub head adjustments, 108
Scrub head drag link arms, 86
Scrub head floor skirts, 132
Scrub head gas spring, 108

Scrub heads, 39

  • Max Pro 1000, Cylindrical, 39
  • Max Pro 1000 , disk, Heavy duty, 39
  • Max Pro 1200, Cylindrical, 39
  • MaxPro 1000 , disk, 39
  • MaxPro 1200, disk, 39

Scrub switch, 21

Scrubbing, 57

  • Double, 61

Scrubbing brushes, 50
Scrubbing information, 49
Scrubbing pads, 50

Seals

  • hopper, 133
  • hopper filter, 133
  • Tank Cover, 42, 68
  • vacuum fan, 133

Seat, suspension, (option), 37
SelfĆ, 94
Service records, 42, 68
Side, Skirts, 131
Side brush adjustment knob, 36
Side brush switch, 24
Side brush(es), replacement & adjustment, 107
Side cover seal, 132

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 152, used with permission. SES ref PF-CALL-WRNF‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‍​​​​‌​⁠​​​‌⁠‌‌‍⁠⁠⁠‍‌‌⁠‍‍⁠​‍‍‌‍‍⁠‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 152 of 154
INDEX

INDEX

  • Side squeegee, Adjusting, 125
  • Side squeegee blades, 127
  • Side squeegees, 125
  • Side sweeping brush(es), information, 107
  • Skirts
    • Recirculation , 131
    • Scrub head floor, 132
    • Side, 131
    • sweeping brush, side, 131
  • Skirts and seals, 131 - 137
    • Recovery tank cover seal, 134
    • Side cover, 132
    • Solution tank cover seal, 134
    • Top cover seals, 132
  • Solution
    • Flow lever, 16
    • System, 116
    • Tank drain hose, 35
  • Solution flow lever, 16
  • Solution system, 116
    • Solution valve, 116
  • Solution Tank, 117
    • Drain hose, 35
    • Draining and cleaning, 62 - 64
    • filling, 46 - 48
    • Positive solution control drain, 35
  • Solution tank cover seal, 134
  • Solution tank drain hose, 35
  • Solution valve, 116
  • Specifications, 144 - 146
    • Braking system, 146
    • Chargers, 145
    • ec-H20 system, 146
    • Electric motors, 145
    • FaST System, 144
    • Hydraulic systems, 146
    • Machine capacities, 144
    • Machine dimensions, 144
    • Machine performance, 145
    • Power type, 145
    • Steering, 146
    • Tires, 146
  • Squeegee, 122 - 125
    • Adjustment, 42, 68
    • Blades, 125
  • Squeegee blades, 125
    • Rear, 125
    • Replacing or rotating rear, 125
    • Replacing side, 127
    • Side, 127
  • Squeegees, Side, 125
  • Staring the machine, 45
  • Static drag chain, 129
  • Steering, 42, 68
    • Specifications, 146
  • Steering gear chain, 88, 129
  • Steering wheel, 13
  • Steering wheel column tilt lever, 16
  • Stop Scrubbing, 61
  • Stop the machine, 67
  • Storage information, 139
  • Super Scrub switch, 21
  • Sweep switch, 24
  • Sweeping assembly, 97
    • Cylindrical conveyor, 105
    • Main sweeping brush, 102
  • Sweeping brush drive belt, 128
  • Sweeping brush side skirts, 131
  • Sweeping brushes
    • main brush replacement, 102
    • side brush information, 107
    • side brush(es) replacement & adjustment, 107
  • Sweeping information, 49
  • Sweeping vacuum fan belt, 129
  • Switch, detergent pump (option), 28
  • Switches
    • ec-H20, 17
    • Edge scrub, 23
    • ES, 22
    • FaST, 16
    • Filter shaker, 25
    • Hopper dump, 27
    • Hopper lower, 26
    • Hopper raise, 26
    • Hopper retract, 27
    • On, 14
    • Operating lights, 15
    • Power kill, 15
    • Power wand, 15
    • Rear squeegee, 23
    • Scrub, 21
    • Side brush, 24
    • Sweep, 24
    • Vacuum fan, 25
  • Symbol definitions, 9, 10
Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 153, used with permission. SES ref PF-R34J-VFIT‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‍‌​​​‌​⁠​​​‌​‍​​⁠‍‌‌​⁠‌‌⁠‌⁠‍‍​​‌​‌
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 153 of 154
INDEX

INDEX

T

Tanks
Recovery, 116
Solution, 117‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍​​‌‍‍‍⁠​‌​‍‌‍⁠​⁠‍​​⁠‌‍

Thermo Sentry, Hopper Temperature Indicator, 26

ThermoĆ, 101

Tie down location, 137

Tires, 135 - 136
Specifications, 146

Top cover seals, 132

Towing machine, 136

Transporting machine, 136

Transporting the machine, 136

Troubleshooting, 79

V

Vacuum fan switch, 25

Vacuum wand, 69 - 73

W

Wheel nuts, Torque, 135

Source: Tennant 8300 Operator Manual 330630 Rev. 20 (8-2015), page 154, used with permission. SES ref PF-FONG-WCYD‌‌​⁠​​⁠⁠​⁠‍‍‍‌​​‌‍‍⁠​​​​‍‌‍‍​​​‌​⁠​​⁠‍​​‌‍‍‍⁠​‌​‍‌‍⁠​⁠‍​​⁠‌‍
8300 330630 (Rev. 20 (8-2015))Page 154 of 154

Tennant and Nobles are trademarks of Tennant Company. Southeastern Equipment & Supply is an independent dealer.

Not Sure Which Machine Fits Your Floors?

Talk to a real SES tech about new, demo or certified reconditioned options, parts and service.

© 2026 Southeastern Equipment and Supply, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Visa Discover AMEX Mastercard